BA01734D/06/EN/01.

17 Products Solutions Services

71377077
Valid as of version
01.00.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promass S 300
EtherNet/IP
Coriolis flowmeter

Keep cover
ti

gh
tw
hile
n
ne
öff
ng
nnu
Spa
 Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to
working procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates to
these instructions.

2 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Table of contents

Table of contents

1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.2 Requirements from environment and
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.5 Symbols for 6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
certain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 27
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.3 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . 27
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 28
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent 6.3 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.1 Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 30
2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.1.4 Device plugs available . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug . . . . . . 33
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 33
2.6 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.2 Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.7 Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 34
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write 7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 12 7.2.3 Connecting the remote display and
2.7.3 Access via fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 40
2.7.4 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7.3 Ensure potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.7.5 Access via CDI-RJ45 service 7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7.4 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.5 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.5.1 Setting the device address . . . . . . . . . 44
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.5.2 Activating the default IP address . . . . 45
7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 Incoming acceptance and product 7.7 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 8 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 8.1 Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 17 8.2 Structure and function of the operating
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 19 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 48
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local
5 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.1 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.2 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting 8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 21 8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 21 8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 57
5.3 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 57
8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Endress+Hauser 3
Table of contents Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 58 10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

8.3.10 User roles and related access 10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter the
authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access 10.6.2 Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 10.6.3 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 132
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad 10.6.4 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 133
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10.6.5 Carrying out additional display
8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 147
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 10.6.8 Using parameters for device
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 62 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 67 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 153
8.5 Access to the operating menu via the 10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 68
8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 156
11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 156
9 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.1 Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 74 11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 74 11.4.1 "Measured variables" submenu . . . . . 157
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.2 Overview of system files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 159
9.3 Integrating the measuring device in the 11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
9.4 Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
9.4.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
9.4.2 Input and output groups . . . . . . . . . . 76 11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
9.5 Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP . . . . . 86 Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
10 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 91
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 169
10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 92 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 93 12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.5.3 Configuring the communication 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 173
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.5.4 Selecting and setting the medium . . . 97 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 175
10.5.5 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 97 12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 175
10.5.6 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 98 12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.5.7 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 99 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 176
10.5.8 Configuring the current output . . . . 100 12.5 Diagnostic information in DeviceCare or
10.5.9 Configuring the pulse/frequency/ FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.5.10 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 114 12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 177
10.5.11 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 117 12.6 Diagnostic information via communication
10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 128 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.5.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe 12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information 178
detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 178
12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 178

4 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Table of contents

12.8 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 179 16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

12.8.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
12.8.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 180 16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12.8.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 184
12.8.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.9 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
12.10 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12.11 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 193
12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 194
12.11.3 Overview of information events . . . . 194
12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

13 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.1 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 199
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

14 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 200
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 200
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 201
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 201

15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 203
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
16.11 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Endress+Hauser 5
About this document Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

1 About this document

1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases
of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and
storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to
troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2 Symbols used

1.2.1 Safety symbols

Symbol Meaning

DANGER!
DANGER This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will
result in serious or fatal injury.

WARNING!
WARNING This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in serious or fatal injury.

CAUTION!
CAUTION This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in minor or medium injury.

NOTE!
NOTICE This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.

1.2.2 Electrical symbols

Symbol Meaning

Direct current

Alternating current

Direct current and alternating current

Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a
grounding system.

Protective Earth (PE)

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other
connections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:
• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3 Communication symbols

Symbol Meaning

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)

Communication via a wireless, local network.

LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP About this document

Symbol Meaning

LED
Light emitting diode is on.

LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4 Tool symbols

Symbol Meaning

Flat blade screwdriver

Allen key

Open-ended wrench

1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information

Symbol Meaning

Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.

Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.

Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.

Tip
Indicates additional information.

Reference to documentation.

A Reference to page.

Reference to graphic.

Notice or individual step to be observed.

1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps.

Result of a step.

Help in the event of a problem.

Visual inspection.

1.2.6 Symbols in graphics

Symbol Meaning

1, 2, 3, ... Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , … Series of steps

A, B, C, ... Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ... Sections

Hazardous area
-

Endress+Hauser 7
About this document Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Symbol Meaning

Safe area (non-hazardous area)

.
Flow direction

1.3 Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• The W@M Device Viewer : Enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate
or scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.
For a detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code
→  231

1.3.1 Standard documentation

Document type Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information Planning aid for your device

The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered for
the device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with
responsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification
• Storage and transport
• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
Instructions The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with
responsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing the
measuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description
• Installation
• Electrical connection
• Operation options
• System integration
• Commissioning
• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters Reference for your parameters

The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed at
those who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

1.4 Registered trademarks

EtherNet/IP™
Trademark of ODVA, Inc.

8 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP About this document

TRI-CLAMP®
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA

Endress+Hauser 9
Basic safety instructions Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2 Basic safety instructions

2.1 Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and
supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the
application).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's
owner-operator.
‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2 Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in these Brief Operating Instructions is intended only for
flow measurement of liquids.

Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is an
increased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and
the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the
intended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the measuring device is not operated at atmospheric temperature, compliance with
the relevant basic conditions specified in the associated device documentation is
absolutely essential: "Documentation" section→  8.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.

Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

10 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Basic safety instructions

NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:
‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level of
contamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.

Residual risks
LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents a
burn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.

2.3 Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.

For welding work on the piping:

‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:
‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury.
‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
Repair
To ensure continued operational safety and reliability,
‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

Endress+Hauser 11
Basic safety instructions Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2.6 IT security
We only provide a warranty if the device is installed and used as described in the
Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it
against any inadvertent changes to the device settings.
IT security measures in line with operators' security standards and designed to provide
additional protection for the device and device data transfer must be implemented by the
operators themselves.

2.7 Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on the
operator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater in-
operation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.

Function/interface Factory setting Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write Not enabled. Individually following risk assessment.
protection switch →  12

Access code Not enabled Assign an individual access code during

(also applies for Web server login or (0000). commissioning.
FieldCare connection) →  13

WLAN Enabled. Individually following risk assessment.

(order option in display module)

WLAN security mode Enabled (WPA2- Do not change.

PSK)

WLAN passphrase Serial number Assign an individual access code during

(password) →  13 commissioning.

WLAN mode Access Point Individually following risk assessment.

Web server→  13 Enabled. Individually following risk assessment.

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13 – Individually following risk assessment.

2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool
(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to the
parameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  154.

2.7.2 Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or access
to the device via the WLAN interface.
• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or
tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.

12 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Basic safety instructions

User-specific access code

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool
(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code
(→  153).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to
0000 (open).

WLAN passphrase
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  70) which can be ordered as an option is protected by the
network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the IEEE 802.11
standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter
(→  146).

General notes on the use of passwords

• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed during
commissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code and
network key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose the
password, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  153

2.7.3 Access via fieldbus

When communicating via fieldbus, access to the device parameters can be restricted to
"Read only" access. The option can be changed in the Fieldbus writing access parameter.
This does not affect cyclic measured value transmission to the higher-order system, which
is always guaranteed.
For detailed information, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document
pertaining to the device →  231

2.7.4 Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  60). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45), the connection
for EtherNet/IP signal transmission (RJ45 connector) or the WLAN interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document
pertaining to the device →  231

2.7.5 Access via CDI-RJ45 service interface

The device can be connected to a network via the CDI-RJ45 service interface. Device-
specific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
It is advisable to take relevant security concepts into consideration, such as those issued by
the Federal Office for Information Security. This includes organizational security measures

Endress+Hauser 13
Basic safety instructions Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

such as the assignment of access authorization as well as technical measures such as

network segmentation.
The device can be integrated in a ring topology. The device is integrated via the
terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the connection to the
service interface (CDI-RJ45) →  39.

14 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Product description

3 Product description
The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1 Product design

1 2 3 4

Ni
Spcht Pow
an un
Do nu te er
en no ngr

öf
er t op öf

f ne
Ne gize fn
so pa den when

n
us s ou
tens vr en
ionir

ter
I/O

un
Nicht
la y
i sp

e
ar

ES
C
–

5
A0029586

1 Important components of a measuring device

1 Connection compartment cover
2 Display module
3 Transmitter housing
4 Electronics compartment cover
5 Sensor

Endress+Hauser 15
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification

4.1 Incoming acceptance

Are the order codes on the
delivery note (1) and the
A0028673
product sticker (2) identical?
1 1
2 2

Are the goods undamaged?

A0028673

Do the nameplate data

Order code:
Ser. no.:
match the ordering
information on the delivery
Ext. ord. cd.:

A0028673

note?
i i

Date:

Is the CD-ROM with the

Technical Documentation
A0028673
(depends on device version)
and documents present?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  17.

4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the measuring device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in W@M Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the measuring device is
displayed.
• Enter the serial number from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations App
or scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser
Operations App: all the information for the measuring device is displayed.

16 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Incoming acceptance and product identification

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• The chapters "Additional standard documentation on the device" →  8 and
"Supplementary device-dependent documentation" →  8
• The W@M Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate

1 2 3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:
Ext. ord. cd.:
20 6
19
7
18
17
16
15
14 8
i i

Date: 9

13 12 11 10
A0029192

2 Example of a transmitter nameplate

1 Manufacturing location
2 Name of the transmitter
3 Order code
4 Serial number (ser. no.)
5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
6 Degree of protection
7 Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
8 Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
9 2-D matrix code
10 Manufacturing date: year-month
11 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
12 Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
13 Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
14 Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
15 Space for additional information in the case of special products
16 Permitted temperature range for cable
17 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
18 Information on cable gland
19 Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
20 Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser 17
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

4.2.2 Sensor nameplate

2
Order code: 3
Ser. no.: 4
Ext. ord. cd.: 5

14
13
i i 8
Date:
9
10

12 11
A0029199

3 Example of a sensor nameplate

1 Name of the sensor
2 Manufacturing location
3 Order code
4 Serial number (ser. no.)
5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
6 Nominal diameter of the sensor; flange nominal diameter/nominal pressure; sensor test pressure; medium
temperature range; material of measuring tube and manifold; sensor-specific information: e.g. pressure range
of secondary containment, wide-range density specification (special density calibration)
7 Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
8 Flow direction
9 Manufacturing date: year-month
10 2-D matrix code
11 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
12 CE mark, C-Tick
13 Surface roughness
14 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) are
always listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approval-
related specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are also
ordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE
+).

18 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device

Symbol Meaning

WARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.

Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.

Protective ground connection

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

Endress+Hauser 19
Storage and transport Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

5 Storage and transport

5.1 Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:
‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature→  218

5.2 Transporting the product

Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They

prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring tube.

5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

20 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Storage and transport

5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

5.3 Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable:
• Measuring device secondary packaging: polymer stretch film that conforms to EC
Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).
• Packaging:
– Wood crate, treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, which is confirmed by the
affixed IPPC logo.
or
– Carton in accordance with European Packaging Directive 94/62EC; recyclability is
confirmed by the affixed RESY symbol.
• Seaworthy packaging (optional): Wood crate, treated in accordance with ISPM 15
standard, which is confirmed by the affixed IPPC logo.
• Carrying and mounting hardware:
– Disposable plastic pallet
– Plastic straps
– Plastic adhesive strips
• Dunnage: Paper cushion

Endress+Hauser 21
Installation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

6 Installation

6.1 Installation conditions

No special measures such as supports are necessary. External forces are absorbed by the
construction of the device.

6.1.1 Mounting position

Mounting location

A0028772

To prevent measuring errors arising from accumulation of gas bubbles in the measuring
tube, avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe:
• Highest point of a pipeline.
• Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.

Installation in down pipes

However, the following installation suggestion allows for installation in an open vertical
pipeline. Pipe restrictions or the use of an orifice with a smaller cross-section than the
nominal diameter prevent the sensor running empty while measurement is in progress.

A0028773

4 Installation in a down pipe (e.g. for batching applications)

1 Supply tank
2 Sensor
3 Orifice plate, pipe restriction
4 Valve
5 Batching tank

22 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Installation

DN Ø orifice plate, pipe restriction

[mm] [in] [mm] [in]

8 ³⁄₈ 6 0.24

15 ½ 10 0.40

25 1 14 0.55

40 1½ 22 0.87

50 2 28 1.10

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).

Orientation Recommendation

A Vertical orientation

A0015591

1)
B Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
top Exceptions:
→  5,  23
A0015589

2)
C Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
bottom Exceptions:
→  5,  23
A0015590

D Horizontal orientation, transmitter at

side
A0015592

1) Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain the
minimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
2) Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.

If a sensor is installed horizontally with a curved measuring tube, match the position of the
sensor to the fluid properties.

1 2
A0028774

5 Orientation of sensor with curved measuring tube

1 Avoid this orientation for fluids with entrained solids: Risk of solids accumulating.
2 Avoid this orientation for outgassing fluids: Risk of gas accumulating.

Endress+Hauser 23
Installation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Inlet and outlet runs

No special precautions need to be taken for fittings which create turbulence, such as
valves, elbows or T-pieces, as long as no cavitation occurs →  24.

A0029322 A0029323

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

6.1.2 Requirements from environment and process

Ambient temperature range

Measuring device • –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

• Order code for "Test, certificate", option JP:
–50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F)

Readability of the local –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)

display The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the
temperature range.

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature→  218

‣ If operating outdoors:
Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.

You can order a weather protection cover from Endress+Hauser : →  202

System pressure
It is important that cavitation does not occur, or that gases entrained in the liquids do not
outgas.
Cavitation is caused if the pressure drops below the vapor pressure:
• In liquids that have a low boiling point (e.g. hydrocarbons, solvents, liquefied gases)
• In suction lines
‣ Ensure the system pressure is sufficiently high to prevent cavitation and outgassing.
For this reason, the following mounting locations are recommended:
• At the lowest point in a vertical pipe
• Downstream from pumps (no danger of vacuum)

A0028777

24 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Installation

Thermal insulation
In the case of some fluids, it is important to keep the heat radiated from the sensor to the
transmitter to a low level. A wide range of materials can be used for the required
insulation.
The following device versions are recommended for versions with thermal insulation:
Version with extended neck for insulation:
Order code for "Sensor option", option CG with an extended neck length of
105 mm (4.13 in).

NOTICE
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ Recommended orientation: horizontal orientation, transmitter housing pointing
downwards.
‣ Do not insulate the transmitter housing .
‣ Maximum permissible temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing:
80 °C (176 °F)
‣ Thermal insulation with extended neck free: the insulation is omitted around the
extended neck. We recommend that you do not insulate the extended neck in order to
ensure optimum dissipation of heat.

A0034391

6 Thermal insulation with extended neck free

Heating
NOTICE
Electronics can overheat due to elevated ambient temperature!
‣ Observe maximum permitted ambient temperature for the transmitter .
‣ Depending on the fluid temperature, take the device orientation requirements into
account .

NOTICE
Danger of overheating when heating
‣ Ensure that the temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing does not
exceed 80 °C (176 °F).
‣ Ensure that convection takes place on a sufficiently large scale at the transmitter neck.
‣ Ensure that a sufficiently large area of the housing support remains exposed. The
uncovered part serves as a radiator and protects the electronics from overheating and
excessive cooling.

Heating options
If a fluid requires that no heat loss should occur at the sensor, users can avail of the
following heating options:
• Electrical heating, e.g. with electric band heaters
• Via pipes carrying hot water or steam
• Via heating jackets

Endress+Hauser 25
Installation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Using an electrical trace heating system

If heating is regulated via phase angle control or pulse packages, magnetic fields can affect
the measured values (= for values that are greater than the values permitted by the EN
standard (sine 30 A/m)).
For this reason, the sensor must be magnetically shielded: the housing can be shielded
with tin plates or electric sheets without a privileged direction (e.g. V330-35A).
The sheet must have the following properties:
• Relative magnetic permeability µr ≥ 300
• Plate thickness d ≥ 0.35 mm (d ≥ 0.014 in)

Vibrations
The high oscillation frequency of the measuring tubes ensures that the correct operation of
the measuring system is not influenced by plant vibrations.

6.1.3 Special mounting instructions

Securing with mounting clamp in the case of hygiene connections

It is not necessary to provide additional support for the sensor for operational performance
purposes. If, however, additional support is required for installation purposes, the
following dimensions must be observed.
Use mounting clamp with lining between clamp and measuring instrument.

B
C

A0030298

DN A B C

[mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in] [mm] [in]

8 ³⁄₈ 298 11.73 33 1.3 28 1.1

15 ½ 402 15.83 33 1.3 28 1.1

25 1 542 21.34 33 1.3 38 1.5

40 1½ 658 25.91 36.5 1.44 56 2.2

50 2 772 30.39 44.1 1.74 75 2.95

Zero point adjustment

All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  213. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:
• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures or
very high-viscosity fluids).

26 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Installation

Protective cover

280 (11.0) 255 (10.0)

146 (5.75) 134 (5.3) 12 (0.47) 30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)
A0029553

6.2 Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1 Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools

6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device

1. Remove all remaining transport packaging.
2. Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.
3. Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

6.2.3 Mounting the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of the
process connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the gaskets are clean and undamaged.
‣ Install the gaskets correctly.
1. Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the nameplate of the sensor matches the
flow direction of the fluid.
2. Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.


A0029263

Endress+Hauser 27
Installation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4.

öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
te r

un
un

Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +

E E

e
e
ar ar

3 mm 1. 4 mm 3.
2.

A0029993

1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Release the fixing screw.
4. Turn the housing to the desired position.
5. Firmly tighten the securing screw.
6. Screw on the connection compartment cover
7. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.2.5 Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
te r

un
un

Nicht
Nicht

ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +
ES
C
E – E

E
e
e

ar ar

3 mm 1. 3.
2.

A0030035

1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.
4. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
5. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

28 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Installation

6.3 Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 

Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
• Process temperature →  218
• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical 
Information" document)
• Ambient temperature
• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?

• According to sensor type 
• According to medium temperature
• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through the

piping →  23?

Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)? 

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight? 

Are the securing screw and securing clamp tightened securely? 

Endress+Hauser 29
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

7 Electrical connection
NOTICE
The measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so that
the power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1 Connection conditions

7.1.1 Required tools

• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools
• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper
• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule
• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.

Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.

Protective ground cable

Cable: 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.

Permitted temperature range

• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.

Power supply cable

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Signal cable
EtherNet/IP
The standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex specifies CAT 5 as the minimum category for
a cable used for EtherNet/IP. CAT 5e and CAT 6 are recommended.
For more information on planning and installing EtherNet/IP networks, please refer
to the "Media Planning and Installation Manual. EtherNet/IP" of ODVA Organization

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

30 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Status input
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Cable diameter
• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Requirements for the connecting cable

Optionally available connecting cable

A cable is supplied depending on the order option
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option O
or
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and
• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E

Standard cable 2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pair-
stranded)

Flame resistance According to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistance According to DIN EN 60811-2-1

Shielding Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %

Capacitance: core/shield ≤200 pF/m

L/R ≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length 5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Standard cable - customer-specific cable

No cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max.
300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.

Standard cable 4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

Shielding Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %

Capacitance: core/shield Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Endress+Hauser 31
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Max. cable length for use in

Non-hazardous area,
Cross-section
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) 80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG) 120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG) 240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG) 300 m (1 000 ft)

32 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

7.1.3 Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs

The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual order
version of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an
adhesive label in the terminal cover.

Supply voltage Input/output 1 Input/output 2 Input/output 3

1 (+) 2 (–) EtherNet/IP 24 (+) 25 (–) 22 (+) 23 (–)

(RJ45 connector)
Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in
terminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  40.

7.1.4 Device plugs available

Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!

Order code for "Input; output 1", option NA "EtherNet/IP"

Order code for Cable entry/connection

"Electrical connection" 2 3

L, N, P, U Connector M12 × 1 –
1) 2) 1) 2) 1) 2) 1) 2)
R ,S ,T ,V Connector M12 × 1 Connector M12 × 1

1) Cannot be combined with an external WLAN antenna (order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8) of
an RJ45 M12 adapter for the service interface (order code for "Accessories mounted", option NB) or of the
remote display and operating module DKX001
2) Suitable for integrating the device in a ring topology.

7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug

2 Pin Assignment

1 + Tx

2 + Rx
1 3
3 - Tx

4 - Rx
4
A0016812
Coding Plug/socket

D Socket

7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1. Remove dummy plug if present.

Endress+Hauser 33
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2. If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:

Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.
3. If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  30.

7.2 Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-
specific Ex documentation.

7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter

1
2
3
4

A0026781

1 Terminal connection for supply voltage

2 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
3 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display and
operating module DKX001
4 Protective earth (PE)

In addition to connecting the device via EtherNet/IP and the available inputs/outputs,
additional connection options are also available:
• Integrate into a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) →  38.
• Integrate the device into a ring topology →  39.

Connecting the EtherNet/IP connector

3.
öf
öf

f ne
f ne

n
n

te r
ter

un
un

Nicht
Nicht

ES
ES C
C
– –

+ +

E E

ES
C
–
e
e

ar + ar

4. E

3 mm 1. 3.
2.

A0029813

1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

34 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

4. Remove the display module holder.

Nich Po Nich Po
Sp t Sp t
an un w an un w
Do nu te er Do nu te er
en no ngr en no ngr

öf

öf
er t

f ne
er t

f ne
öf öf
Ne gi op fn Ne gi op fn
so pa zeden when so pa zeden when

n
us s ou er us s ou
tens vr en tens vr en
ionir Powr en ionir
te fn n
un g öf whe

te r

te r
I/O ichtnnun en I/O

un

un
Npa t op

6. S noze d vrir
Doergis ouion

Nicht

Nicht
en patens
Neus
so
I/O

e
ar ar

ES ES
C C
– –

+ +

E E

5.

A0029814

5. Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6. Open the terminal cover.

11.
22 mm
24 mm 9.
7.

N
Spicht Pow
a u

8.
D nn nte er
eno no ungr

öf
f ne
e t ö
N rgizop ffn
soe pa eden w en

n
us s o he
ten uv n
siorir
n

te r
un
t
Nich
≤4

e
2

ar
(1
.6
)

10.

A0033722

7. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the
sealing ring from the cable entry.
8. Strip the cable and cable ends and connect to the RJ45 connector.
9. Connect the protective ground.
10. Plug in the RJ45 connector.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the EtherNet/IP connection process.

Endress+Hauser 35
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Connecting the supply voltage and additional inputs/outputs

1.
2.
10 (0.4)

öf
f ne
n
ter
un
Nicht
mm (in)

e
ar

ES
C
–

3.
+

A0033983

1. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the
sealing ring from the cable entry.
2. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.
3. Connect the protective ground.

5.

öf
f ne
n
22 mm

te r
un
Nicht
24 mm

e
ar

ES
C
–

4.

A0033984

4. Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .

 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is
documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or
→  33.
5. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.
6. Close the terminal cover.
7. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.
8. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
9. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

36 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)

1.

2.

A0029598

7 Engineering unit mm (in)

1. To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes
2. while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser 37
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a network

This section only presents the basic options for integrating the device into a network.
For information on the procedure to follow to connect the transmitter correctly →  34.

Integrating via the service interface

The device is integrated via the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:
• Recommended cable: CAT 5e, CAT 6 or CAT 7, with shielded connector
• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm
• Bending radius: 5 x cable thickness

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngr

öf
f ne
e t ö
Ne rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n

n
us s o he
ten uv n
siorir
n

te r
I/O

un
t
Nich
e
ar

≤4
2
(1
.6
)

A0033703

1 Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:

Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

38 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

Integrating into a ring topology

The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and
the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:
• Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded connector
• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm
• Bending radius: 2.5 x cable thickness

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngr

öf
f ne
e t ö
Ne rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n

n
us s o he
ten uv n
siorir
n

te r
un
t
Nich
e
ar

≤4
2
(1
.6
)
1

A0033717

1 EtherNet/IP connection
2 Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:

Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

Endress+Hauser 39
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

7.2.3 Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  202.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for the
following housing version: order code for "Housing": option A "Aluminum, coated"
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

Gnd
Vcc
A B
81 82 83 84
1
2

3
81 82 83 84
4

Gnd
A B
5 Vcc

A0027518

1 Remote display and operating module DKX001

2 Protective earth (PE)
3 Connecting cable
4 Measuring device
5 Protective earth (PE)

7.3 Ensure potential equalization

7.3.1 Requirements
No special measures for potential equalization are required.

40 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

7.4 Special connection instructions

7.4.1 Connection examples

EtherNet/IP

1 2 3 4

A0028767

8 Connection example for EtherNet/IP

1 Control system (e.g. PLC)
2 Ethernet switch
3 Observe cable specifications
4 Device plug
5 Transmitter

EtherNet/IP: DLR (Device Level Ring)

1 2 3 4

A0027544

1 Control system (e.g. PLC)

2 Ethernet switch
3 Observe cable specifications →  30
4 Connecting cable between the two transmitters
5 Transmitter

Current output 4-20 mA

1 2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

9 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Analog display unit: observe maximum load
3 Transmitter

Endress+Hauser 41
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

1 2 3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 10 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
3 Analog display unit: observe maximum load
4 Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1 2

12345
A0028761

 11 Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

1 Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  208

Switch output

1 2

A0028760

 12 Connection example for switch output (passive)

1 Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  208

42 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

Relay output

1 2

A0028760

 13 Connection example for relay output (passive)

1 Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values →  209

Current input

1 2 3

A0028915

 14 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

1 Power supply
2 External measuring device (for reading in pressure or temperature, for instance)
3 Transmitter: Observe input values

Status input

1 2

A0028764

 15 Connection example for status input

1 Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: Observe input values

Endress+Hauser 43
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

7.5 Hardware settings

7.5.1 Setting the device address

The IP address of the measuring device can be configured for the network via DIP switches.

Addressing data

IP address and configuration options

1st octet 2nd octet 3rd octet 4th octet
192. 168. 1. XXX
↓ ↓
Can only be configured via software addressing Can be configured via software addressing
and hardware addressing

IP address range 1 to 254 (4th octet)

IP address broadcast 255

Addressing mode ex Software addressing; all DIP switches for hardware addressing are set to OFF.
works

IP address ex works DHCP server active

Software addressing: The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter

(→  96) .

Setting the IP address

Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:
‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.
The default IP address may not be activated →  45.

1 128
IP Address setting

2 64
3 32
(last octet)

4 16
5 8
6 4
7 2
8 1

A0029635

1. Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover and
disconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary.
3. Set the desired IP address using the corresponding DIP switches on the I/O
electronics module.
4. Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.
5. Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The configured device address is used once the device is restarted.

44 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Electrical connection

7.5.2 Activating the default IP address

The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device expects an IP
address to be assigned by the network. This function can be disabled and the device can be
set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212 by DIP switch.

Activating the default IP address via the DIP switch

Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:
‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

Off On
1
2
3
4

A0034499

1. Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover and
disconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .
3. Set DIP switch No. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF → ON.
4. Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.
5. Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.

7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.

To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.
2. Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.
3. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.
4. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
5. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").


A0029278

6. Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.

Endress+Hauser 45
Electrical connection Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

7.7 Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 

Do the cables used meet the requirements? 

Do the cables have adequate strain relief? 

Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"

→  45 ?

If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module? 

46 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

8 Operation options

8.1 Overview of operation options

ESC

- + E

1 2 3 4 5
A0034513

1 Local operation via display module

2 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
3 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
5 Mobile handheld terminal
6 Control system (e.g. PLC)

Endress+Hauser 47
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

8.2 Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  231

Operating menu for operators and maintenances

Language !
Operatation Language

Parameter 1
Operator

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Setup Device tag

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1
Maintenance

Task-oriented
Wizard n / Parameter n

Advanced setup Enter access code

Parameter 1

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Diagnostics Parameter 1

Parameter n

Submenu 1

Submenu n

Operating menu for experts

Expert Access status display

Parameter n

System
Function-oriented

Sensor
Expert

Input

Output

Communication

Application

Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 16 Schematic structure of the operating menu

48 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

8.2.2 Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.

Menu/parameter User role and tasks Content/meaning

Language task-oriented Role "Operator", "Maintenance" • Defining the operating language

Tasks during operation: • Defining the Web server operating language
• Configuring the operational • Resetting and controlling totalizers
display
Operation • Reading measured values • Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)
• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Setup "Maintenance" role Wizards for fast commissioning:

Commissioning: • Set the system units
• Configuration of the • Configuration of the communication interface
measurement • Define the medium
• Configuration of the inputs and • Display I/O/configuration
outputs • Configure the inputs
• Configuration of the • Configure the outputs
communication interface • Configuring the operational display
• Define the output conditioning
• Set the low flow cut off
• Configure partial and empty pipe detection
Advanced setup
• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)
• Configuration of totalizers
• Configure the WLAN settings
• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)

Diagnostics "Maintenance" role Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
Fault elimination: errors:
• Diagnostics and elimination of • Diagnostic list
process and device errors Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Measured value simulation • Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values
• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Expert function-oriented Tasks that require detailed Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to access
knowledge of the function of the these parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu is
device: based on the function blocks of the device:
• Commissioning measurements • System
under difficult conditions Contains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern the
• Optimal adaptation of the measurement or the communication interface.
measurement to difficult • Sensor
conditions Configuration of the measurement.
• Detailed configuration of the • Input
communication interface Configuring the status input.
• Error diagnostics in difficult cases • Output
Configuring of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configure the functions that go beyond the actual measurement (e.g.
totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

Endress+Hauser 49
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1 Operational display

2 XXXXXXXXX F 3

4 1120.50
kg/h

A0029348

1 Operational display
2 Device tag
3 Status area
4 Display area for measured values (4-line)
5 Operating elements→  55

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:
• Status signals→  173
– F: Failure
– C: Function check
– S: Out of specification
– M: Maintenance required
• Diagnostic behavior→  174
– : Alarm
– : Warning
• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )
• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)

Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:

Measured variable Measurement channel Diagnostic behavior

number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example

Appears only if a diagnostics

event is present for this
measured variable.

Measured values
Symbol Meaning

Mass flow

• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

50 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

• Density
• Reference density

Temperature

Totalizer

 displayed.
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is

Output

 The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.

Status input

Measurement channel numbers

Symbol Meaning

Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  174

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via the
Format display parameter (→  118).

8.3.2 Navigation view

In the submenu In the wizard

1 1

2 /../Operation 0091-1 3 2 /../Select medium 3

Access stat.disp Select medium
Operator Liquid
Locking status 4
Display 4

5 5

A0013993-EN A0013995-EN

1 Navigation view
2 Navigation path to current position
3 Status area
4 Display area for navigation
5 Operating elements →  55

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of the
following elements:

Endress+Hauser 51
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

• In the submenu: Omission symbol for Name of current

Display symbol for menu operating menu levels in • Submenu
• In the wizard: between • Wizard
Display symbol for wizard • Parameters

↓ ↓ ↓

Examples / ../ Display

/ ../ Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section
→  52

Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:
• In the submenu
– The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)
– If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  173
• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  57

Display area

Menus
Symbol Meaning

Operation
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu

Setup
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu

Diagnostics
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu

Expert
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters

Symbol Meaning

Submenu

Wizard

Parameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.

52 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

Locking
Symbol Meaning

Parameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
Symbol Meaning

Switches to the previous parameter.

Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.

Opens the editing view of the parameter.

8.3.3 Editing view

Numeric editor

1 +0.000 Xx
0 1 2 3 4
2 5 6 7 8 9
+ –
3

A0034250

 17 For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

1 Entry display area
2 Input screen
3 Confirm, delete or reject entry
4 Operating elements

Endress+Hauser 53
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Text editor

1 Xxxxxxx
A B C D E F G H I J K
2 L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z 6
3 7

5
4

A0034114

 18 For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

1 Entry display area
2 Current input screen
3 Change input screen
4 Operating elements
5 Move entry position
6 Delete entry
7 Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing view

Operating key(s) Meaning

Minus key
Move the entry position to the left.

Plus key
Move the entry position to the right.

Enter key
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

+ Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Input screens

Symbol Meaning

Upper case

Lower case

Numbers

Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }

Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _

Umlauts and accents

54 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

Controlling data entries

Symbol Meaning

Move entry position

Reject entry

Confirm entry

Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position

Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position

Clear all the characters entered

8.3.4 Operating elements

Operating key(s) Meaning

Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a choose list.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.

Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a choose list.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.

Enter key
For operational display
• Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
• Pressing the key for 2 s opens the context menu including the option for activating the
keypad lock.
In a menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
– Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
– Starts the wizard.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

Endress+Hauser 55
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Operating key(s) Meaning

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

In a menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
– Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
+
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").
With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)

+
Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.

8.3.5 Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly from
the operational display:
• Setup
• Data backup
• Simulation

Calling up and closing the context menu

The user is in the operational display.
1. Press  for 2 s.
 The context menu opens.

XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on
l/h
A0034608-EN

2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

1. Open the context menu.
2. Press  to navigate to the desired menu.
3. Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

56 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of the
individual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements
→  51
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
Main menu 0104-1
Language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Language
2. Display/operat.

Setup
/ ../Display/operat. 0091-1
Access stat.disp
3. Operator
Locking status
Display
/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
4. Display

/ ../Display 0098-1
Format display
5. 1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
6. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
7. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
XXXXXXXXX
10.50
8. 2s mA
2800
Hz

A0029562-EN

8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access

Endress+Hauser 57
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.

00914-2 1

A0029414

1 Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:

• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"
• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter
• If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8 Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.

Calling up and closing the help text

The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1. Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.

Ent. access code

Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 19 Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9 Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

58 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

Ent. access code

Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor
- with symbols →  53, for a description of the operating elements →  55

8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to the
parameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  153.

Defining access authorization for user roles

An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Access
authorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the
"Maintenance" user role.
‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.

Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role

Access code status Read access Write access

An access code has not yet been defined

 
(factory setting).
1)
After an access code has been defined.  

1) The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role

Access code status Read access Write access

After an access code has been defined.  –– 1)

1) Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted from
the write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
section

The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Access
status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is
write-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  153.

Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specific
access code in the Enter access code parameter (→  131) via the respective access
option.
1. After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.

Endress+Hauser 59
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2. Enter the access code.

 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously write-
protected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock

The keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu or
change the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.

Switching on the keypad lock

The keypad lock is switched on automatically:
• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.

To activate the keylock manually:

1. The device is in the measured value display.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.

If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, the
Keylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

1. The keypad lock is switched on.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. In the context menu select the Keylock off option.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1 Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status
of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation for
the device →  232

60 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

8.4.2 Prerequisites
Computer hardware
Hardware Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

Interface The computer must have an RJ45 The operating unit must have a
interface. WLAN interface.

Connection Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 Connection via Wireless LAN.
connector.

Screen Recommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Computer software
Software Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

Recommended operating • Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.

systems • Mobile operating systems:
– iOS
– Android

 Microsoft Windows XP is supported.

Web browsers supported • Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox
• Google Chrome
• Safari

Computer settings
Settings Interface

CDI-RJ45 WLAN

User rights Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
Web browser deselected .

JavaScript JavaScript must be enabled.

 Ifenter
JavaScript cannot be enabled:
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Web
browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.

 When installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display,

clear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.

Switch off all other network Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN. connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  170

Endress+Hauser 61
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface

Device CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  67

IP address If the IP address of the device is not known:
• The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics → Device information → IP address
• Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212.
The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device
expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can be
disabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212:
set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF → ON.

 Set the default IP address →  45.

Measuring device: via WLAN interface

Device WLAN interface

Measuring device The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:

• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  67

IP address If the IP address of the device is not known:
• The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics → Device information → IP address
• Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212.
The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device
expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can be
disabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212:
set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF → ON.

 Set the default IP address →  45.

8.4.3 Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Preparing the measuring device
1. Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.
3. The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and the
communication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

62 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer

The IP address can be assigned to the measuring device in a variety of ways:
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), factory setting:
The IP address is automatically assigned to the measuring device by the automation
system (DHCP server).
• Hardware addressing:
The IP address is set via DIP switches →  44.
• Software addressing:
The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter (→  96) .
• DIP switch for "Default IP address":
To establish the network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the fixed IP
address 192.168.1.212 is used →  45.
The measuring device works with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), on
leaving the factory, i.e. the IP address of the measuring device is automatically assigned by
the automation system (DHCP server).
To establish a network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the "Default IP
address" DIP switch must be set to ON. The measuring device then has the fixed IP address:
192.168.1.212. This address can now be used to establish the network connection.

1. Via DIP switch 2, activate the default IP address 192.168.1.212: →  45.

2. Switch on the measuring device.
3. Connect to the computer using a cable →  69.
4. If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,
Internet or Windows Explorer.
5. Close any open Internet browsers.
6. Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address 192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).

Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.

Endress+Hauser 63
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device

1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.

The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

Starting the Web browser

1. Start the Web browser on the computer.

64 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

2. Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.

1 2 3 4 5

7
8

10

A0029417

1 Picture of device
2 Device name
3 Device tag
4 Status signal
5 Current measured values
6 Operating language
7 User role
8 Access code
9 Login
10 Reset access code (→  149)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  170

8.4.4 Logging on
1. Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.
2. Enter the user-specific access code.
3. Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code 0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.

Endress+Hauser 65
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

8.4.5 User interface

1
2

A0029418

1 Function row
2 Local display language
3 Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:
• Device name
• Device tag
• Device status with status signal →  176
• Current measured values

Function row

Functions Meaning

Measured values Displays the measured values of the measuring device

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device

• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
Menu
 For detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data exchange between PC and measuring device:

• Device configuration:
– Load settings from the device
(XML format, save configuration)
– Save settings to the device
(XML format, restore configuration)
• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)
Data • Documents - Export documents:
management – Export backup data record
(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)
– Verification report
(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)
• File for system integration - If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system
integration from the measuring device:
EtherNet/IP: EDS file
• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
Network the measuring device:
configuration • Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)
• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout End the operation and call up the login page

66 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in the
navigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.

Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:
• Configuring parameters
• Reading measured values
• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6 Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.

Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Web server functionality Switch the Web server on and off. • Off On
• HTML Off
• On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter

Option Description

Off • The web server is completely disabled.

• Port 80 is locked.

On • The complete functionality of the web server is available.

• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server

If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:
• Via local display
• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7 Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function
(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

1. Select the Logout entry in the function row.

 The home page with the Login box appears.
2. Close the Web browser.

Endress+Hauser 67
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

3. If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  63.

If communication with the Web server was established via the default IP address
192.168.1.212, DIP switch No. 10 must be reset (from ON → OFF). Afterwards, the IP
address of the device is active again for network communication.

8.5 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool

Via EtherNet/IP network

This communication interface is available in device versions with EtherNet/IP.

Star topology

1 2 3

5 5 5
A0032078

 20 Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: star topology

1 Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation)
2 Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
4 Ethernet switch
5 Measuring device

Ring topology
The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and
the service interface (CDI-RJ45).

68 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

1 2 3

5 5 5
A0033725

 21 Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: ring topology

1 Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation)
2 Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
4 Ethernet switch
5 Measuring device

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

A0027563

 22 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

1 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
2 Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
3 Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Endress+Hauser 69
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Via WLAN interface

The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control + WLAN"

3 4 1 2 3 4

5 6 7
A0034570

1 Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna

2 Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
3 LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
4 LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
5 Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for
accessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
6 Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
7 Smartphone or tablet

Function WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)

• Access point with DHCP server (default setting)
• Network

Encryption WPA2-PSK/AES 128 bit

Configurable WLAN channels 1 to 11

Degree of protection IP67

Available antennas • Internal antenna

• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place of
installation.

 Only one antenna active in each case!

Max. range 50 m (164 ft)

Materials: • Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-

External WLAN antenna plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Connector: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal

NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.

70 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).

Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.

The serial number can be found on the nameplate.

To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2 FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is
also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  69
• WLAN interface→  70
Typical functions:
• Configuring parameters of transmitters
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• Documentation of the measuring point
• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S

Source for device description files

See information →  74

Establishing a connection
1. Start FieldCare and launch the project.

Endress+Hauser 71
Operation options Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2. In the network: Add a device.

 The Add device window opens.
3. Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.
4. Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in the
context menu that opens.
5. Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.
6. Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter to
confirm.
7. Establish the online connection to the device.

For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

User interface

2 3 4 5 6 7

Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx
1 Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status: Good

Xxxxxx Mass flow unit: kg/h

PAccess status tooling Maintenance Volume flow unit: m³/h
+ Operation
– Setup
PDevice tag Xxxxxx
– System units
P Mass flow unit kg/h
8 P Volume flow unit m³/h
9
+ Select medium
+ …
+ …
+ Advanced setup
+ Diagnostics
+ Expert

10 11
A0021051-EN

1 Header
2 Picture of device
3 Device name
4 Tag name
5 Status area with status signal→  176
6 Display area for current measured values
7 Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
8 Navigation area with operating menu structure
9 Working area
10 Range of action
11 Status area

8.5.3 DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

72 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation options

The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated
"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,
comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S

Source for device description files

See information →  74

Endress+Hauser 73
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

9 System integration

9.1 Overview of device description files

9.1.1 Current version data for the device

Firmware version 01.00.zz • On the title page of the Operating Instructions

• On the transmitter nameplate
• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
version

Release date of firmware version 10.2017 ---

Manufacturer ID 0x11 Manufacturer ID

Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer
ID

Device type ID 0x103B Device type

Diagnostics → Device information → Device type

Device revision • Major revision 1 • On the transmitter nameplate

• Minor revision 1 • Device revision
Diagnostics → Device information → Device
revision

Device profile Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  198

9.1.2 Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the table
below, along with information on where the file can be acquired.

Operating tool via Sources for obtaining device descriptions

Service interface (CDI)

FieldCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

9.2 Overview of system files

System files Version Description How to acquire

Electronic Data 2.1 Certified in accordance with the • www.endress.com → Download-

Sheet (EDS following ODVA guidelines: Area
system file) • Conformance test • EDS system file integrated in the
• Performance test device: can be downloaded via
• PlugFest the Web browser
Embedded EDS Support (File Object
0x37)

Add-on Profile • Major System file for "Studio 5000" www.endress.com → Download-
Level 3 revision 1 software (Rockwell Automation) Area
• Minor
revision 1

74 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

9.3 Integrating the measuring device in the system

A detailed description of how to integrate the device into an automation system (e.g.
from Rockwell Automation) is available as a separate document: www.endress.com →
Select country → Automation → Digital communication → Fieldbus device
integration → EtherNet/IP
Protocol-specific data →  212.

9.4 Cyclic data transmission

Cyclic data transmission when using the device master file (GSD).

9.4.1 Block model

The block model shows which input and output data the measuring device makes available
for implicit messaging. Cyclical data exchange is performed using an EtherNet/IP scanner,
e.g. a distributed control system etc.

Measuring device Control system

Input Assembly Fix Permanently assigned →

→  77
(Assem100) 44 byte input group

Mass flow fixed input Permanently assigned →

assembly →  78 input group
(Assem106) 32 byte

Volume flow fixed input Permanently assigned →

assembly →  78 input group
(Assem107) 62 byte

Concentration fixed input Permanently assigned →

assembly 1) →  78 input group
(Assem109) 66 byte

API Referenced corrections Permanently assigned →

Transducer fixed input assembly 2) →  79 input group
(Assem110) 64 byte EtherNet/IP
Block
Water cut % fixed input Permanently assigned →
assembly 2) →  79 input group
(Assem111) 80 byte

Heartbeat monitoring Permanently assigned →

fixed input assembly 3) →  79 input group
(Assem112) 96 byte

Input assembly custom Configurable →

→  80
(Assem101) 88 byte input group

Output assembly fix Permanently assigned ←

→  81
(Assem102) 54 byte output group

Config assembly Permanently assigned →

→  83
(Assem104) 2709 byte configuration

1) Only available with the Concentration application package.

2) Only available with the Petroleum application package.
3) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.

Endress+Hauser 75
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

9.4.2 Input and output groups

Possible configurations

Configuration 1: Exclusive Owner Multicast

Input Assembly Fix Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 64 398 –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x 66 64 5

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 64 44 5

Configuration 2: Input Only Multicast

Input Assembly Fix Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 68 398 –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x C7 – –

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 64 44 5

Configuration 3: Exclusive Owner Multicast

Input Assembly Configurable Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 68 398 –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x 66 64 5

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 65 88 5

Configuration 4: Input Only Multicast

Input Assembly Configurable Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 68 398 –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x C7 – –

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 64 88 5

Configuration 5: Exclusive Owner Multicast

Input Assembly Fix Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 69 – –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x 66 64 5

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 64 44 5

Configuration 6: Input Only Multicast

Input Assembly Fix Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 69 – –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x C7 – –

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 65 44 5

76 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Configuration 7: Exclusive Owner Multicast

Input Assembly Configurable Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 69 – –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x 66 64 5

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 64 88 5

Configuration 8: Input Only Multicast

Input Assembly Configurable Instance Size (byte) Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable Configuration 0 x 69 – –

Output Assembly Fix O → T Configuration 0 x C7 – –

Input Assembly Fix T → O Configuration 0 x 65 88 5

Possible connections

No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9

Number of connections 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Input assembly fixed (Assem100) X

Mass flow fixed input assembly X

(Assem106)

Volume flow fixed input assembly X

(Assem107)

Input assembly custom (Assem101) X

Viscosity fixed input assembly X

(Assem108)

Concentration fixed input assembly X

(Assem109)

API Referenced corrections fixed X

input assembly (Assem110)

Water cut % fixed input assembly X

(Assem111)

Heartbeat monitoring fixed input X

assembly (Assem112)

Permanently assigned input group

Input assembly fixed (Assem100), 44 byte

Description Byte

1. File header (not visible) 1-4

1)
2. Current diagnosis 5-8

3. Mass flow 9-12

4. Volume flow 13-16

5. Corrected volume flow 17-20

6. Temperature 21-24

7. Density 25-28

8. Reference density 29-32

9. Totalizer 1 33-36

Endress+Hauser 77
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Description Byte

10. Totalizer 2 37-40

11. Totalizer 3 41-44

1) Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP →  86

Mass flow fixed input assembly (Assem106), 32 byte

Description Byte

1. File header (not visible) 1-4

1)
2. Current diagnosis 5-8

3. Mass flow 9-12

4. Density 13-16

5. Temperature 17-20

6. Totalizer 1 21-24

7. Mass flow unit 25-26

8. Density unit 27-28

9. Temperature unit 29-30

10. Totalizer 1 unit 31-32

1) Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP →  86

Volume flow fixed input assembly (Assem107), 62 byte

Description Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly 1-32

2. Volume flow 33-36

3. Corrected volume flow 37-40

4. Reference density 41-44

5. Totalizer 2 45-48

6. Totalizer 3 49-52

7. Volume flow unit 53-54

8. Corrected volume flow unit 55-56

9. Reference density unit 57-58

10. Totalizer 2 unit 59-60

11. Totalizer 3 unit 61-62

Concentration fixed input assembly (Assem109), 66 byte 1)

Description Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly 1-32

2. Target mass flow 33-36

3. Carrier mass flow 37-40

4. Target volume flow 41-44

5. Carrier volume flow 45-48

6. Target corrected volume flow 49-52

7. Carrier corrected volume flow 53-56

78 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Description Byte

8. Concentration 57-60

9. Volume flow unit 61-62

10. Corrected volume flow unit 63-64

11. Concentration unit 65-66

1) Only available with the Concentration application package.

API Referenced corrections fixed input assembly (Assem110), 60 byte 1)

Description Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly 1-32

2. Alternative reference density 33-36

3. GSV flow 37-40

4. Alternative GSV flow 41-44

5. NSV flow 45-48

6. Alternative NSV flow 49-52

7. S&W volume flow 53-56

8. Volume flow unit 57-58

9. Reference density unit 59-60

1) Only available with the Petroleum application package.

Water cut % fixed input assembly (Assem111), 76 byte 1)

Description Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly 1-32

2. Oil density 33-36

3. Water density 37-40

4. Water cut % 41-44

5. Oil mass flow 45-48

6. Water mass flow 49-52

7. Oil volume flow 53-56

8. Water volume flow 57-60

9. Oil corrected volume flow 61-64

10. Water corrected volume flow 65-68

11. Volume flow unit 69-70

12. Corrected volume flow unit 71-72

13. Oil density unit 73-74

14. Water density unit 75-76

1) Only available with the Petroleum application package

Heartbeat monitoring fixed input assembly (Assem112), 100 byte 1)

Description Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly 1-32

2. Signal asymmetry 33-36

Endress+Hauser 79
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Description Byte

3. Oscillation frequency 0 37-40

4. Oscillation frequency 1 41-44

5. Oscillation amplitude 0 45-48

6. Oscillation amplitude 1 49-52

7. Oscillation damping 0 53-56

8. Oscillation damping 1 57-60

9. Tube damping fluctuation 0 61-64

10. Tube damping fluctuation 1 65-68

11. Exciter current 0 69-72

12. Exciter current 1 73-76

13. HBSI 77-80

14. Frequency fluctuation 0 81-84

15. Frequency fluctuation 1 85-88

16. Electronic temperature 89-92

17. Carrier pipe temperature 93-96

18. Verification status 97-98

19. Verification results 99-100

1) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.

Configurable input group

Input assembly custom (Assem101), 88 byte

Description Format

1. - 10. Input values 1 to 10 Real

11. - 20. Input values 11 to 20 Double integer

Possible input values

Possible input values 1 to 10:

• Off • Temperature • Exciter current 0

• Mass flow • Carrier tube temperature 2) • Exciter current 1 2)
• Volume flow • Electronic temperature • Monitoring of exciter current 0
• Corrected volume flow • Oscillation frequency 0 • Monitoring of exciter current 1 2)
• Target mass flow 1) • Oscillation frequency 1 2) • HBSI 2)
• Carrier mass flow 1) • Oscillation amplitude 0 • Totalizer 1
• Target volume flow 1) • Oscillation amplitude 1 2) • Totalizer 2
• Carrier volume flow 1) • Frequency fluctuation 0 • Totalizer 3
• Target corrected volume flow 1) • Frequency fluctuation 1 2) • Alternative reference density 3)
• Carrier corrected volume flow 1) • Oscillation damping 0 • GSV flow 3)
• Density • Oscillation damping 1 • Alternative GSV flow 3)
• Reference density • Tube damping fluctuation 0 • NSV flow 3)
• Concentration 1) • Tube damping fluctuation 1 • Alternative NSV flow 3)
• Signal asymmetry • S&W volume flow 3)

1) Only available with the Concentration application package.

2) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
3) Only available with the Petroleum application package.

80 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Possible input values 11 to 20:

• Off • Temperature unit • Totalizer 1 unit

• Actual diagnostics • Density unit • Totalizer 2 unit
• Previous diagnosis • Reference density unit • Totalizer 3 unit
• Mass flow unit • Concentration unit • Verification results
• Volume flow unit • Current unit • Verification status
• Corrected volume flow unit • Status zero point adjustment

Permanently assigned output group

Output assembly fix (Assem102), 54 byte

Description (format) Byte Bit Value

1. Totalizer 1 1 0

2. Totalizer 2 1

3. Totalizer 3 2

4. Verification 3 • 0: Enable
5. Concentration of medium type 4 • 1: Disable

6. Compensation, pressure 5

7. Reference density compensation 6

8. Compensation, temperature 7

9. S&W correction value % 2 0

10. Water cut % 1

11. Flow override 2

12. Zero point adjustment 3 • 0: Enable

13. Not used 4 • 1: Disable

14. Not used 5

15. Not used 6

16. Not used 7

17. Not used 3-4 16 –

18. Control totalizer 1 (integer) 5-6 16 • 32226 (0): Add

• 32490 (1): Reset and stop
19. Control totalizer 2 (integer) 7-8 16 • 32228 (2): Default value and stop
20. Control totalizer 3 (integer) 9-10 16 • 198 (3): Reset and add
• 199 (4): Default value and add
• 32928 (3): Stop

21. Start verification (integer) 11-12 16 • 32823 (0): Cancel

• 33158 (1): Start

Endress+Hauser 81
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format) Byte Bit Value

22. Select concentration of medium type 13-14 16 • 3062 (0) : Aqueous Fructose
• 3063 (0) : Aqueous Glucose
• 3068 (0) : Aqueous Hydrochloric Acid
• 3077 (0) : Aqueous Hydrogen
Peroxide
• 3065 (0) : Aqueous Sucrose
• 3064 (0) : Aqueous Invert Sugar
• 3069 (0) : Aqueous Nitric Acid
• 3070 (0) : Aqueous Phosphoric Acid
• 3075 (0) : Aqueous Potassium
Hydroxide
• 3071 (0) : Aqueous Sodium Hydroxide
• 3060 (0) : Ethanol Water
• 3061 (0) : Methanol Water
• 3066 (0) : Ammonium Nitrate In
Water
• 3067 (0) : Ferric Chloride In Water
• 3073 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup
42
• 3074 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup
55
• 3072 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup
90
• 3092 (0) : Percent Volume / Percent
Mass
• 3081 (0) : Wort
• 3082 (0) : Coef Set 1
• 3083 (0) : Coef Set 2
• 3084 (0) : Coef Set 3

23. Not used 15-16 16 –

24. External pressure (real) 17-20 32 Data format:

Byte 1-4: External pressure
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

25. External pressure unit (integer) 21-22 16 • 1610 (11): Pa a

• 1616 (12): kPa a
• 1614 (237): MPa a
• 1137 (7): bar
• 1611 (240): Pa g
• 1617 (240): kPa a
• 1615 (240): MPa a
• 32797 (7): bar g
• 1142 (6): psi a
• 1143 (240): psi g

26. Not used 23-24 16 –

27. External reference density (real) 25-28 32 Data format:

Byte 1-4: External ref. density
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

28. External reference density unit (integer) 29-30 16 • 32840 (240): kg/Nm3
• 32841 (240): kg/Nl
• 32842 (240): g/Scm3
• 32843 (240): kg/Scm3
• 32844 (240): lb/Sft3

29. Not used 31-32 16 –

30. External temperature (real) 33-36 32 Data format:

Byte 1-4: External temperature
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

31. External temperature unit (integer) 37-38 16 • 1001 (32): °C

• 1002 (33): °F
• 1000 (35): K
• 1003 (34): °R

32. Not used 39-40 16 –

82 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Description (format) Byte Bit Value

33. External value % S&W (real) 41-44 32 Data format:

Byte 1-4: External value, % S&W
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

34. External value, water cut % (real) 45-48 32 Data format:

Byte 1-4: External value, water cut %
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

35 Flow override monitoring 49-50 16 • 33004 (0): Off

• 33006 (1): On

36 Zero point adjustment monitoring 51-52 16 • 32823 (0): Cancel

• 33242 (0): Active
• 248 (0): Error zero point adjustment
• 33158 (1): Start

Permanently assigned configuration group

Config assembly (Assem104), 2704 byte

Description (format) Bits Byte Offset

1. None 32 4 0

2. Parameter 36 – Write protection 8 1 4

3. None 8 1 5

4. Parameter 87 System units Mass flow unit 16 2 6

5. Parameter 86 System units Mass unit 16 2 8

6. Parameter 93 System units Volume flow unit 16 2 10

7. Parameter 92 System units Volume unit 16 2 12

8. Parameter 80 System units Corrected volume flow unit 16 2 14

9. Parameter 79 System units Corrected volume unit 16 2 16

10. Parameter 81 System units Density unit 16 2 18

11. Parameter 89 System units Reference density unit 16 2 20

12. Parameter 91 System units Temperature unit 16 2 22

13. None 16 2 24

14. Parameter 88 System units Press. eng. unit 16 2 26

15. Parameter 85 System units Kinematic viscosity unit 16 2 28

16. Parameter 84 System units Dynamic viscosity unit 16 2 30

17. Parameter 78 System units Concentration unit 16 2 32

18. Parameter 82 System units Oil density unit 16 2 34

19. Parameter 83 System units Water density unit 16 2 36

20. Parameter 90 System units Water reference density unit 16 2 38

21. None 32 4 40

22. None 16 2 44

23. Parameter 224 – Enter access code 16 2 46

24. Parameter 94 Totalizer 1 Assign process variable 16 2 48

25. Parameter 106 Totalizer 1 Unit totalizer 16 2 50

26. Parameter 103 Totalizer 1 Totalizer operation mode 16 2 52

27. Parameter 100 Totalizer 1 Failure mode 16 2 54

28. Parameter 244 Totalizer operation Preset value tot. 1 32 4 56

29. Parameter 97 Totalizer operation Control totalizer 1 16 2 60

Endress+Hauser 83
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format) Bits Byte Offset

30. Parameter 95 Totalizer 2 Assign process variable 16 2 62

31. Parameter 107 Totalizer 2 Unit totalizer 16 2 64

32. Parameter 104 Totalizer 2 Totalizer operation mode 16 2 66

33. Parameter 101 Totalizer 2 Failure mode 16 2 68

34. Parameter 98 Totalizer operation Control totalizer 2 16 2 70

35. Parameter 245 Totalizer operation Preset value tot. 2 32 4 72

36. Parameter 96 Totalizer 3 Assign process variable 16 2 76

37. Parameter 108 Totalizer 3 Unit totalizer 16 2 78

38. Parameter 105 Totalizer 3 Totalizer operation mode 16 2 80

39. Parameter 102 Totalizer 3 Failure mode 16 2 82

40. Parameter 246 Totalizer operation Preset value tot. 3 32 4 84

41. Parameter 99 Totalizer operation Control totalizer 3 16 2 88

42. Parameter 16 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 1 16 2 90

43. Parameter 27 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 2 16 2 92

44. Parameter 29 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 3 16 2 94

45. Parameter 30 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 4 16 2 96

46. Parameter 31 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 5 16 2 98

47. Parameter 32 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 6 16 2 100

48. Parameter 33 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 7 16 2 102

49. Parameter 34 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 8 16 2 104

50. Parameter 35 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 9 16 2 106

51. Parameter 17 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 10 16 2 108

52. Parameter 18 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 11 16 2 110

53. Parameter 19 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 12 16 2 112

54. Parameter 20 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 13 16 2 114

55. Parameter 21 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 14 16 2 116

56. Parameter 22 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 15 16 2 118

57. Parameter 23 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 16 16 2 120

58. Parameter 24 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 17 16 2 122

59. Parameter 25 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 18 16 2 124

60. Parameter 26 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 19 16 2 126

61. Parameter 28 Configurable input assembly Input assembly position 20 16 2 128

62. Parameter 38 Sensor adjustment Flow direction 16 2 130

63. Parameter 40 Process parameter Flow override 16 2 132

64. Parameter 37 Low flow cut off Assign process variable 16 2 134

65. Parameter 39 Empty pipe detection Assign process variable 16 2 136

66. Parameter 41 Corrected volume flow calculation Corrected volume flow calculation 16 2 138

67. Parameter 188 Low flow cut off On value low flow cut off 32 4 140

68. Parameter 187 Low flow cut off Off value low flow cutoff 32 4 144

69. Parameter 209 Low flow cut off Pressure shock suppression 32 4 148

70. Parameter 191 Empty pipe detection Low value partial filled pipe detection 32 4 152

71. Parameter 189 Partially filled pipe detection High value partial filled pipe detection 32 4 156

72. Parameter 190 Empty pipe detection Response time part. filled pipe detect. 32 4 160

84 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Description (format) Bits Byte Offset

73. Parameter 182 Corrected volume flow calculation Fixed reference density 32 4 164

74. Parameter 186 Corrected volume flow calculation Linear expansion coefficient 32 4 168

75. Parameter 211 Corrected volume flow calculation Square expansion coefficient 32 4 172

76. Parameter 210 Corrected volume flow calculation Reference temperature 32 4 176

77. Parameter 183 Process parameter Flow damping 32 4 180

78. Parameter 184 Process parameter Density damping 32 4 184

79. Parameter 185 Process parameter Temperature damping 32 4 188

80. Parameter 5 External compensation Pressure compensation 16 2 192

81. Parameter 6 External compensation Temperature mode 16 2 194

82. Parameter 2 Medium selection Select medium 16 2 196

83. Parameter 3 Medium selection Select gas type 16 2 198

84. Parameter 119 External compensation Pressure value 32 4 200

85. Parameter 133 Medium selection Temperature coefficient sound velocity 32 4 204

86. Parameter 128 Medium selection Reference sound velocity 32 4 208

87. Parameter 115 Empty pipe detection Max. damping empty pipe detection 32 4 212

88. Parameter 241 Diagnostic settings Alarm delay 32 4 216

89. Parameter 58 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 220

information 046

90. Parameter 57 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 221

information 140

91. Parameter 59 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 222

information 144

92. Parameter 60 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 223

information 374

93. Parameter 61 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 224

information 302

94. None 8 1 225

95. Parameter 74 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 16 2 226

information 441

96. Parameter 75 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 16 2 228

information 442

97. Parameter 76 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 16 2 230

information 443

98. Parameter 73 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 16 2 232

information 444

99. Parameter 62 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 234

information 830

100. Parameter 63 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 235

information 831

101. Parameter 64 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 236

information 832

102. Parameter 65 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 237

information 833

103. Parameter 66 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 238

information 834

104. Parameter 67 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 239

information 835

105. Parameter 72 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 16 2 240

information 862

Endress+Hauser 85
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format) Bits Byte Offset

106. Parameter 68 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 242

information 912

107. Parameter 69 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 243

information 913

108. Parameter 70 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 244

information 944

109. Parameter 71 Diagnostic behavior Assign behavior for diagnostic 8 1 245

information 948

110. None 32 4 246

111. None 16 2 250

112. Parameter 12 Concentration Liquid type 16 2 252

113. None 32 4 254

114. None 16 2 258

115. Parameter 138 Concentration Coefficient A0 32 4 260

116. Parameter 141 Concentration Coefficient A1 32 4 264

117. Parameter 144 Concentration Coefficient A2 32 4 268

118. Parameter 147 Concentration Coefficient A3 32 4 272

119. Parameter 150 Concentration Coefficient A4 32 4 276

120. Parameter 153 Concentration Coefficient B1 32 4 280

121. Parameter 156 Concentration Coefficient B2 32 4 284

122. Parameter 159 Concentration Coefficient B3 32 4 288

123. Parameter 162 Concentration Coefficient D1 32 4 292

124. Parameter 165 Concentration Coefficient D2 32 4 296

125. Parameter 168 Concentration Coefficient D3 32 4 300

126. Parameter 171 Concentration Coefficient D4 32 4 304

127. Parameter 55 Petroleum mode 16 2 308

128. Parameter 53 API product group 16 2 310

129. Parameter 54 API table selection 16 2 312

130. None 16 2 314

131. Parameter 237 Thermal expansion coefficient 32 4 316

132. Parameter 220 Oil density sample 32 4 320

133. Parameter 235 Oil temperature sample 32 4 324

134 Parameter 230 Oil pressure sample 32 4 328

135 Parameter 222 Water density sample 32 4 332

136 Parameter 236 Water temperature sample 32 4 336

9.5 Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP

Status signal No. Short text Value

000 – 0

F 882 Input signal 16777265

F 910 Tubes not oscillating 16777296

F 437 Configuration incompatible 16777312

F 242 Software incompatible 16777319

86 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Status signal No. Short text Value

F 252 Modules incompatible 16777323

F 272 Main electronic failure 16777337

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777340

F 271 Main electronic failure 16777341

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777343

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777344

F 825 Operating temperature 16777352

F 410 Data transfer 16777355

F 273 Main electronic failure 16777368

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777375

F 083 Memory content 16777376

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777377

F 022 Sensor temperature 16777406

F 022 Sensor temperature 16777407

F 833 Electronic temperature too low 16777409

F 832 Electronic temperature too high 16777411

F 834 Process temperature too high 16777413

F 835 Process temperature too low 16777414

F 270 Main electronic failure 16777428

F 022 Sensor temperature 16777429

F 022 Sensor temperature 16777430

F 062 Sensor connection 16777435

F 062 Sensor connection 16777436

F 311 Electronic failure 16777441

F 273 Main electronic failure 16777445

F 082 Data storage 16777447

F 190 Special event 2 16777450

F 273 Main electronic failure 16777483

F 390 Special event 3 16777490

F 062 Sensor connection 16777491

F 062 Sensor connection 16777492

F 992 Special event 13 16777503

F 590 Special event 4 16777508

F 990 Special event 5 16777509

F 991 Special event 9 16777510

F 591 Special event 8 16777511

F 391 Special event 7 16777512

F 191 Special event 6 16777513

F 262 Module connection 16777545

F 537 Configuration 16777546

F 201 Device failure 16777547

F 192 Special event 10 16777552

F 392 Special event 11 16777553

Endress+Hauser 87
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Status signal No. Short text Value

F 592 Special event 12 16777554

F 382 Data storage 16777581

F 383 Memory content 16777582

F 283 Memory content 16777583

F 144 Measuring error too high 16777671

C 411 Up-/download active 33554536

C 411 Up-/download active 33554537

C 411 Up-/download active 33554540

C 484 Simulation failure mode 33554576

C 485 Simulation measured variable 33554579

C 453 Flow override 33554580

C 833 Electronic temperature too low 33554625

C 832 Electronic temperature too high 33554627

C 834 Process temperature too high 33554629

C 835 Process temperature too low 33554630

C 992 Special event 13 33554719

C 192 Special event 10 33554768

C 392 Special event 11 33554769

C 592 Special event 12 33554770

C 495 Simulation diagnostic event 33554782

C 302 Device verification active 33554926

M 438 Dataset 67108970

M 833 Electronic temperature too low 67109057

M 832 Electronic temperature too high 67109059

M 834 Process temperature too high 67109061

M 835 Process temperature too low 67109062

M 311 Electronic failure 67109090

M 992 Special event 13 67109151

M 192 Special event 10 67109200

M 392 Special event 11 67109201

M 592 Special event 12 67109202

S 825 Operating temperature 134217861

S 825 Operating temperature 134217863

S 842 Process limit 134217873

S 862 Partly filled pipe 134217874

S 830 Sensor temperature too high 134217920

S 833 Electronic temperature too low 134217921

S 831 Sensor temperature too low 134217922

S 832 Electronic temperature too high 134217923

S 912 Medium inhomogeneous 134217924

S 834 Process temperature too high 134217925

S 835 Process temperature too low 134217926

S 046 Sensor limit exceeded 134217928

88 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP System integration

Status signal No. Short text Value

S 046 Sensor limit exceeded 134217930

S 140 Sensor signal 134217932

S 913 Medium unsuitable 134217933

S 274 Main electronic failure 134217934

S 274 Main electronic failure 134217935

S 912 Medium inhomogeneous 134217951

S 912 Inhomogeneous 134218005

S 992 Special event 13 134218015

S 843 Process limit 134218019

S 192 Special event 10 134218064

S 392 Special event 11 134218065

S 592 Special event 12 134218066

S 912 Inhomogeneous 134218082

S 948 Tube damping too high 134218088

S 944 Monitoring failed 134218182

I 1089 Power on 268435545

I 1090 Configuration reset 268435546

I 1091 Configuration changed 268435547

I 1110 Write protection switch changed 268435566

I 1111 Density adjust failure 268435567

I 1137 Electronic changed 268435593

I 1151 History reset 268435607

I 1155 Reset electronic temperature 268435611

I 1157 Memory error event list 268435613

I 1185 Display backup done 268435641

I 1186 Restore via display done 268435642

I 1187 Settings downloaded with display 268435643

I 1188 Display data cleared 268435644

I 1189 Backup compared 268435645

I 1209 Density adjustment ok 268435665

I 1221 Zero point adjust failure 268435677

I 1222 Zero point adjustment ok 268435678

I 1256 Display: access status changed 268435712

I 1264 Safety sequence aborted 268435720

I 1335 Firmware changed 268435791

I 1361 Wrong web server login 268435817

I 1397 Fieldbus: access status changed 268435853

I 1398 CDI: access status changed 268435854

I 1444 Device verification passed 268435900

I 1445 Device verification failed 268435901

I 1446 Device verification active 268435902

I 1447 Record application reference data 268435903

I 1448 Application reference data recorded 268435904

Endress+Hauser 89
System integration Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Status signal No. Short text Value

I 1449 Recording application ref. data failed 268435905

I 1450 Monitoring off 268435906

I 1451 Monitoring on 268435907

I 1457 Failed: Measured error verification 268435913

I 1459 Failed: I/O module verification 268435915

I 1460 Failed: Sensor integrity verification 268435916

I 1461 Failed: Sensor verification 268435917

I 1462 Failed: Sensor electronic module verific. 268435918

90 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

10 Commissioning

10.1 Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:
‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist→  29
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  46

10.2 Switching on the measuring device

‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.

If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to

the section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  169.

10.3 Connecting via FieldCare

• For FieldCare →  69 connection
• For connecting via FieldCare →  71
• For the FieldCare →  72 user interface

10.4 Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX XX
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Operation
Setup
Display language 0104-1
2. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Display language 0104-1
3. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Hauptmenü 0104-1
4. Sprache
Deutsch
Betrieb
Setup

A0029420

 23 Taking the example of the local display

Endress+Hauser 91
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5 Configuring the measuring device

• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
Display language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
2. Setup

Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
Medium selection
3.
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX

A0032222-EN

 24 Taking the example of the local display

Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available in
every device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.

 Setup

Device tag →  93

‣ System units →  93

‣ Communication →  95

‣ Medium selection →  97

‣ I/O configuration →  97

‣ Current input 1 to n →  98

‣ Status input 1 to n →  99

‣ Current output 1 to n →  100

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  104

1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n →  114

92 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

‣ Display →  117

‣ Low flow cut off →  128

‣ Partially filled pipe detection →  129

‣ Advanced setup →  130

10.5.1 Defining the tag name

To enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter a
unique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.

1 XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 25 Header of the operational display with tag name

1 Tag name

Enter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  72

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Device tag

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry Factory setting

Device tag Enter the name for the measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promass
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

10.5.2 Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available in
every device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → System units

‣ System units

Mass flow unit →  94

Mass unit →  94

Endress+Hauser 93
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Volume flow unit →  94

Volume unit →  94

Corrected volume flow unit →  94

Corrected volume unit →  94

Density unit →  94

Reference density unit →  95

Temperature unit →  95

Pressure unit →  95

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Mass flow unit Select mass flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• kg/h
Result
• lb/min
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Low flow cut off
• Simulation process variable

Mass unit Select mass unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg
• lb

Volume flow unit Select volume flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• l/h
Result
• gal/min (us)
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Low flow cut off
• Simulation process variable

Volume unit Select volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• l (DN > 150 (6"): m³)
• gal (us)

Corrected volume flow unit Select corrected volume flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• Nl/h
Result
• Sft³/min
The selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow parameter
(→  157)

Corrected volume unit Select corrected volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• Nl
• Sft³

Density unit Select density unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg/l
Result
• lb/ft³
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Simulation process variable
• Density adjustment (Expert menu)

94 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Reference density unit Select reference density unit. Unit choose list Country-dependent
• kg/Nl
• lb/Sft³

Temperature unit Select temperature unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• °C
Result
• °F
The selected unit applies for:
• Electronic temperature parameter
(6053)
• Maximum value parameter (6051)
• Minimum value parameter (6052)
• External temperature parameter (6080)
• Maximum value parameter (6108)
• Minimum value parameter (6109)
• Carrier pipe temperature parameter
(6027)
• Maximum value parameter (6029)
• Minimum value parameter (6030)
• Reference temperature parameter
(1816)
• Temperature parameter

Pressure unit Select process pressure unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• bar a
Result
• psi a
The unit is taken from:
• Pressure value parameter (→  97)
• External pressure parameter
(→  97)
• Pressure value

10.5.3 Configuring the communication interface

The Communication submenu guides you systematically through all the parameters that
have to be configured for selecting and setting the communication interface.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Communication

‣ Communication

MAC address →  96

Default network settings →  96

DHCP client →  96

IP address →  96

Subnet mask →  96

Default gateway →  96

Endress+Hauser 95
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry

MAC address Displays the MAC address of the measuring Unique 12-digit character Each measuring device is given
device. string comprising letters and an individual address.
numbers, e.g.:
 MAC = Media Access Control 00:07:05:10:01:5F

Default network settings Select whether to restore network settings. • Off Off
• On

DHCP client Select to activate/deactivate DHCP client • Off Off

functionality. • On
Result
If the DHCP client functionality of the Web
server is activated, the IP address, Subnet
mask and Default gateway are set
automatically.

 Identification is via the MAC address

of the measuring device.

IP address Displays the IP address of the Web server of 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the 192.168.1.212
the measuring device. particular octet)

Subnet mask Displays the subnet mask. 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the 255.255.255.0
particular octet)

Default gateway Displays the default gateway. 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the 0.0.0.0
particular octet)

96 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

10.5.4 Selecting and setting the medium

The Select medium wizard submenu contains parameters that must be configured in
order to select and set the medium.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Select medium

‣ Medium selection

Select medium →  97

Pressure compensation →  97

Pressure value →  97

External pressure →  97

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Select medium – Select medium type. Liquid Liquid

Pressure compensation – Select pressure compensation • Off Off

type. • Fixed value
• External value
• Current input 1 *
• Current input 2 *

Pressure value The Fixed value option is Enter process pressure to be Positive floating- 0 bar
selected in the Pressure used for pressure correction. point number
compensation parameter.

External pressure The External value option is Shows the external process Positive floating- 0 bar
selected in the Pressure pressure value. point number
compensation parameter.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.5 Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
in which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → I/O configuration

‣ I/O configuration

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers →  98

I/O module 1 to n information →  98

I/O module 1 to n type →  98

Endress+Hauser 97
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Apply I/O configuration →  98

Alteration code →  98

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used –
module. • 26-27 (I/O 1)
• 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

I/O module 1 to n information Shows information of the plugged I/O • Not plugged –
module. • Invalid
• Not configurable
• Configurable
• EtherNet/IP

I/O module 1 to n type Shows the I/O module type. • Off Off
• Current output *
• Current input *
• Status input *
• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *

Apply I/O configuration Apply parameterization of the freely • No No

configurable I/O module. • Yes

Alteration code Enter the code in order to change the I/O Positive integer 0
configuration.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.6 Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the current input.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current input

‣ Current input 1 to n

Terminal number →  99

Signal mode →  99

0/4 mA value →  99

20 mA value →  99

Current span →  99

Failure mode →  99

Failure value →  99

98 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the current input • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode The measuring device is not Select the signal mode for the • Passive Active
approved for use in the current input. • Active
hazardous area with type of
protection Ex-i.

0/4 mA value – Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point 0

number

20 mA value – Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point Depends on country

number and nominal
diameter

Current span – Select current range for • 4...20 mA Country-specific:

process value output and • 4...20 mA NAMUR • 4...20 mA NAMUR
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA US • 4...20 mA US
signal. • 0...20 mA

Failure mode – Define input behavior in alarm • Alarm Alarm

condition. • Last valid value
• Defined value

Failure value In the Failure mode Enter value to be used by the Signed floating-point 0
parameter, the Defined value device if input value from number
option is selected. external device is missing.

10.5.7 Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the status input.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Status input

‣ Status input 1 to n

Assign status input →  100

Terminal number →  100

Active level →  100

Terminal number →  100

Response time status input →  100

Terminal number →  100

Endress+Hauser 99
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry

Terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
status input module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign status input Select function for the status input. • Off Off
• Reset totalizer 1
• Reset totalizer 2
• Reset totalizer 3
• Reset all totalizers
• Flow override

Active level Define input signal level at which the • High High
assigned function is triggered. • Low

Response time status input Define the minimum amount of time the 5 to 200 ms 50 ms
input signal level must be present before the
selected function is triggered.

10.5.8 Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that have
to be set for configuring the current output.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current output

‣ Current output 1 to n

Terminal number →  101

Signal mode →  101

Assign current output 1 to n →  101

Current span →  102

0/4 mA value →  102

20 mA value →  102

Fixed current →  102

Damping output 1 to n →  102

Failure mode →  103

Failure current →  103

100 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the current output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Active
current output. • Active

Assign current output 1 to n – Select process variable for • Off Mass flow
current output. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature *
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Pressure

Endress+Hauser 101
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Current span – Select current range for • 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:

process value output and • 4...20 mA US • 4...20 mA NAMUR
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA • 4...20 mA US
signal. • 0...20 mA
• Fixed current

0/4 mA value One of the following options is Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Current span number • 0 kg/h
parameter (→  102): • 0 lb/min
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
• 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA
• 0...20 mA

20 mA value One of the following options is Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point Depends on country
selected in the Current span number and nominal
parameter (→  102): diameter
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
• 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA
• 0...20 mA

Fixed current The Fixed current option is Defines the fixed output 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Current span current.
parameter (→  102).

Damping output 1 to n One of the following options is Set reaction time for output 0.0 to 999.9 s 1.0 s
selected in the Assign current signal to fluctuations in the
output parameter (→  101): measured value.
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Tube damping fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 Detailed description of
the options Oscillation
frequency, Oscillation
amplitude, Oscillation
damping and Signal
asymmetry: Value 1
display parameter
One of the following options is
selected in the Current span
parameter (→  102):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
• 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA
• 0...20 mA

102 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry

Failure mode One of the following options is Define output behavior in • Min. Max.
selected in the Assign current alarm condition. • Max.
output parameter (→  101): • Last valid value
• Mass flow • Actual value
• Volume flow • Defined value
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
One of the following options is
selected in the Current span
parameter (→  102):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR
• 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA
• 0...20 mA

Failure current The Defined value option is Enter current output value in 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Failure mode alarm condition.
parameter.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 103
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5.9 Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all the
parameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  104

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Operating mode Define the output as a pulse, frequency or • Pulse Pulse

switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Configuring the pulse output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  105

Terminal number →  105

Signal mode →  105

Assign pulse output →  105

Value per pulse →  105

Pulse width →  105

Failure mode →  106

Invert output signal →  106

104 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active

Assign pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in Select process variable for • Off Off
the Operating mode pulse output. • Mass flow
parameter. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow

Value per pulse In the Operating mode Enter measured value at which Signed floating-point Depends on country
parameter, the Pulse option is a pulse is output. number and nominal
selected, and one of the diameter
following options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Pulse width In the Operating mode Define time width of the 0.05 to 2 000 ms 100 ms
parameter, the Pulse option is output pulse.
selected, and one of the
following options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Endress+Hauser 105
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Failure mode In the Operating mode Define output behavior in • Actual value No pulses
parameter, the Pulse option is alarm condition. • No pulses
selected, and one of the
following options is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Configuring the frequency output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  107

Terminal number →  107

Signal mode →  107

Assign frequency output →  108

Minimum frequency value →  109

Maximum frequency value →  109

Measuring value at minimum →  110

frequency

Measuring value at maximum →  110

frequency

Failure mode →  111

Failure frequency →  111

Invert output signal →  111

106 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active

Endress+Hauser 107
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign frequency output The Frequency option is Select process variable for • Off Off
selected in the Operating frequency output. • Mass flow
mode parameter (→  104). • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature *
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• HBSI
• Pressure

108 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Minimum frequency value In the Operating mode Enter minimum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
parameter, the Frequency
option is selected, and one of
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

Maximum frequency value In the Operating mode Enter maximum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 10 000.0 Hz
parameter, the Frequency
option is selected, and one of
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

Endress+Hauser 109
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Measuring value at minimum In the Operating mode Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency parameter, the Frequency minmum frequency. number and nominal
option is selected, and one of diameter
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

Measuring value at maximum In the Operating mode Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency parameter, the Frequency maximum frequency. number and nominal
option is selected, and one of diameter
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

110 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Failure mode In the Operating mode Define output behavior in • Actual value 0 Hz
parameter, the Frequency alarm condition. • Defined value
option is selected, and one of • 0 Hz
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

Failure frequency In the Operating mode Enter frequency output value 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
parameter, the Frequency in alarm condition.
option is selected, and one of
the following options is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  108):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Density
• Reference density
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe temperature *
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Frequency fluctuation 0
• Oscillation amplitude 0 *
• Oscillation damping 0
• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 111
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Configuring the switch output

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Operating mode →  112

Terminal number →  112

Signal mode →  112

Switch output function →  113

Assign diagnostic behavior →  113

Assign limit →  113

Assign flow direction check →  114

Assign status →  114

Switch-on value →  114

Switch-off value →  114

Switch-on delay →  114

Switch-off delay →  114

Failure mode →  114

Invert output signal →  114

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active

112 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Switch output function The Switch option is selected Select function for switch • Off Off
in the Operating mode output. • On
parameter. • Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Status

Assign diagnostic behavior • In the Operating mode Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Switch switch output. • Alarm or warning
option is selected. • Warning
• In the Switch output
function parameter, the
Diagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Assign limit • The Switch option is Select process variable for limit • Mass flow Mass flow
selected in the Operating function. • Volume flow
mode parameter. • Corrected volume
• The Limit option is selected flow
in the Switch output • Target mass flow *
function parameter. • Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Oscillation
damping
• Pressure

Endress+Hauser 113
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign flow direction check • The Switch option is Select process variable for flow • Off Mass flow
selected in the Operating direction monitoring. • Volume flow
mode parameter. • Mass flow
• The Flow direction check • Corrected volume
option is selected in the flow
Switch output function
parameter.

Assign status • The Switch option is Select device status for switch • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
selected in the Operating output. detection detection
mode parameter. • Low flow cut off
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Switch-on value • In the Operating mode Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Switch switch-on point. number • 0 kg/h
option is selected. • 0 lb/min
• In the Switch output
function parameter, the
Limit option is selected.

Switch-off value • In the Operating mode Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Switch switch-off point. number • 0 kg/h
option is selected. • 0 lb/min
• In the Switch output
function parameter, the
Limit option is selected.

Switch-on delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Switch-off delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.

Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed

Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.10 Configuring the relay output

The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the relay output.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n

Switch output function →  115

114 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Assign flow direction check →  115

Assign limit →  116

Assign diagnostic behavior →  116

Assign status →  116

Switch-off value →  116

Switch-on value →  116

Failure mode →  117

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Relay output function – Select the function for the • Closed Closed
relay output. • Open
• Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Digital Output

Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the relay output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign flow direction check In the Relay output function Select process variable for flow • Off Mass flow
parameter, the Flow direction direction monitoring. • Volume flow
check option is selected. • Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Endress+Hauser 115
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Assign limit In the Relay output function Select process variable for limit • Mass flow Mass flow
parameter, the Limit option is function. • Volume flow
selected. • Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Oscillation
damping
• Pressure

Assign diagnostic behavior In the Relay output function Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Diagnostic switch output. • Alarm or warning
behavior option is selected. • Warning

Assign status In the Relay output function Select device status for switch • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
parameter, the Digital Output output. detection detection
option is selected. • Low flow cut off

Switch-off value In the Relay output function Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Limit option is switch-off point. number • 0 kg/h
selected. • 0 lb/min

Switch-off delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.

Switch-on value In the Relay output function Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Limit option is switch-on point. number • 0 kg/h
selected. • 0 lb/min

116 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Switch-on delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.

Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.11 Configuring the local display

The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can
configured for configuring the local display.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Display

‣ Display

Format display →  118

Value 1 display →  119

0% bargraph value 1 →  120

100% bargraph value 1 →  120

Value 2 display →  121

Value 3 display →  123

0% bargraph value 3 →  124

100% bargraph value 3 →  125

Value 4 display →  126

Endress+Hauser 117
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values

118 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Mass flow Mass flow
is shown on the local display. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature *
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Pressure

Endress+Hauser 119
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter

120 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Endress+Hauser 121
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

122 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Endress+Hauser 123
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
Value 3 display parameter. display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

124 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Value 3 display parameter. graph display. number

Endress+Hauser 125
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

126 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser 127
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off

The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that must be set to configure low flow cut off.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off

‣ Low flow cut off

Assign process variable →  128

On value low flow cutoff →  128

Off value low flow cutoff →  128

Pressure shock suppression →  128

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Assign process variable – Select process variable for low • Off Mass flow
flow cut off. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow

On value low flow cutoff One of the following options is Enter on value for low flow cut Positive floating- Depends on country
selected in the Assign process off. point number and nominal
variable parameter diameter
(→  128):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Off value low flow cutoff One of the following options is Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 % 50 %
selected in the Assign process off.
variable parameter
(→  128):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Pressure shock suppression One of the following options is Enter time frame for signal 0 to 100 s 0s
selected in the Assign process suppression (= active pressure
variable parameter shock suppression).
(→  128):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

128 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

10.5.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe detection

The Partial filled pipe detection wizard guides you systematically through all parameters
that have to be set for configuring the monitoring of the pipe filling.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Partially filled pipe detection

‣ Partially filled pipe detection

Assign process variable →  129

Low value partial filled pipe detection →  129

High value partial filled pipe detection →  129

Response time part. filled pipe detect. →  129

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Assign process variable – Select process variable for • Off Off

partially filled pipe detection. • Density
• Reference density

Low value partial filled pipe One of the following options is Enter lower limit value for Signed floating-point 200
detection selected in the Assign process deactivating partialy filled pipe number
variable parameter detection.
(→  129):
• Density
• Reference density

High value partial filled pipe One of the following options is Enter upper limit value for Signed floating-point 6 000
detection selected in the Assign process deactivating partialy filled pipe number
variable parameter detection.
(→  129):
• Density
• Reference density

Response time part. filled pipe One of the following options is Enter time before diagnostic 0 to 100 s 1s
detect. selected in the Assign process message is displayed for
variable parameter partially filled pipe detection.
(→  129):
• Density
• Reference density

Endress+Hauser 129
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

10.6 Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
2. Display/operat.
Setup

Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
3. Medium selection

XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
/ ../Setup
4. XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

/ ../Advanced setup 0092-1

5. Ent. access code

Device tag
****
Def. access code

A0032223-EN

The number of submenus can vary depending on the device version. Some submenus
are not dealt with in the Operating Instructions. These submenus and the parameters
they contain are explained in the Special Documentation for the device.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup

‣ Advanced setup

Enter access code →  131

‣ Calculated values →  131

‣ Sensor adjustment →  132

‣ Totalizer 1 to n →  133

‣ Display →  135

130 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

‣ WLAN settings →  145

‣ Concentration

‣ Heartbeat setup

‣ Configuration backup →  147

‣ Administration →  148

10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry

Enter access code Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters. 0 to 9 999

10.6.2 Calculated values

The Calculated values submenu contains parameters for calculating the corrected volume
flow.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Calculated values

‣ Calculated values

‣ Corrected volume flow calculation

Corrected volume flow calculation →  132

External reference density →  132

Fixed reference density →  132

Reference temperature →  132

Linear expansion coefficient →  132

Square expansion coefficient →  132

Endress+Hauser 131
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry

Corrected volume flow calculation – Select reference density for • Fixed reference Calculated reference
calculating the corrected density density
volume flow. • Calculated
reference density
• External reference
density
• Current input 1 *
• Current input 2 *

External reference density In the Corrected volume flow Shows external reference Floating point –
calculation parameter, the density. number with sign
External reference density
option is selected.

Fixed reference density The Fixed reference density Enter fixed value for reference Positive floating- 1 kg/Nl
option is selected in the density. point number
Corrected volume flow
calculation parameter
parameter.

Reference temperature The Calculated reference Enter reference temperature –273.15 to 99 999 °C Country-specific:
density option is selected in for calculating the reference • +20 °C
the Corrected volume flow density. • +68 °F
calculation parameter.

Linear expansion coefficient The Calculated reference Enter linear, medium-specific Signed floating-point 0.0 1/K
density option is selected in expansion coefficient for number
the Corrected volume flow calculating the reference
calculation parameter density.
parameter.

Square expansion coefficient The Calculated reference For media with a non-linear Signed floating-point 0.0 1/K²
density option is selected in expansion pattern: enter the number
the Corrected volume flow quadratic, medium-specific
calculation parameter expansion coefficient for
parameter. calculating the reference
density.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.3 Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality of
the sensor.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment

‣ Sensor adjustment

Installation direction →  133

‣ Zero point adjustment →  133

132 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Installation direction Set sign of flow direction to match the • Flow in arrow direction Flow in arrow direction
direction of the arrow on the sensor. • Flow against arrow direction

Zero point adjustment

All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  213. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:
• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures or
very high-viscosity fluids).

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment → Zero point adjustment

‣ Zero point adjustment

Zero point adjustment control →  133

Progress →  133

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection / User interface Factory setting

Zero point adjustment control Start zero point adjustment. • Cancel Cancel
• Busy
• Zero point adjust failure
• Start

Progress Shows the progress of the process. 0 to 100 % –

10.6.4 Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Assign process variable →  134

Unit totalizer 1 to n →  134

Totalizer operation mode →  134

Failure mode →  134

Endress+Hauser 133
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection Factory setting

Assign process variable – Select process variable for • Off Mass flow
totalizer. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow

Unit totalizer 1 to n One of the following options is Select process variable totalizer Unit choose list Country-specific:
selected in the Assign process unit. • kg
variable parameter • lb
(→  134) of the Totalizer
1 to n submenu:
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Totalizer operation mode One of the following options is Select totalizer calculation • Net flow total Net flow total
selected in the Assign process mode. • Forward flow total
variable parameter • Reverse flow total
(→  134) of the Totalizer
1 to n submenu:
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Failure mode One of the following options is Define totalizer behavior in • Stop Stop
selected in the Assign process alarm condition. • Actual value
variable parameter • Last valid value
(→  134) of the Totalizer
1 to n submenu:
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

134 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

10.6.5 Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configuration
of the local display.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display

‣ Display

Format display →  136

Value 1 display →  137

0% bargraph value 1 →  138

100% bargraph value 1 →  138

Decimal places 1 →  138

Value 2 display →  139

Decimal places 2 →  140

Value 3 display →  141

0% bargraph value 3 →  142

100% bargraph value 3 →  142

Decimal places 3 →  142

Value 4 display →  143

Decimal places 4 →  144

Display language →  144

Display interval →  144

Display damping →  144

Header →  144

Header text →  144

Separator →  145

Backlight →  145

Endress+Hauser 135
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values

136 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Mass flow Mass flow
is shown on the local display. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration *
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature *
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Pressure

Endress+Hauser 137
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 1 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

138 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Endress+Hauser 139
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

Decimal places 2 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 2 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

140 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Endress+Hauser 141
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
Value 3 display parameter. display. number • 0 kg/h
• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Value 3 display parameter. graph display. number

Decimal places 3 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 3 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

142 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • None None
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Concentration
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude 0
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Endress+Hauser 143
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry
• Oscillation
damping 0
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Current output 4 *
• Pressure

Decimal places 4 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 4 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx

Display language A local display is provided. Set display language. • English English
• Deutsch * (alternatively, the
• Français * ordered language is
• Español * preset in the device)
• Italiano *
• Nederlands *
• Portuguesa *
• Polski *
• русский язык
(Russian) *
• Svenska *
• Türkçe *
• 中文 (Chinese) *
• 日本語
(Japanese) *
• 한국어 (Korean) *
• Bahasa Indonesia *
• tiếng Việt
(Vietnamese) *
• čeština (Czech) *

Display interval A local display is provided. Set time measured values are 1 to 10 s 5s
shown on display if display
alternates between values.

Display damping A local display is provided. Set display reaction time to 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
fluctuations in the measured
value.

Header A local display is provided. Select header contents on local • Device tag Device tag
display. • Free text

Header text In the Header parameter, the Enter display header text. Max. 12 characters ------------
Free text option is selected. such as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,
%, /)

144 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Separator A local display is provided. Select decimal separator for • . (point) . (point)
displaying numerical values. • , (comma)

Backlight One of the following Switch the local display • Disable Enable
conditions is met: backlight on and off. • Enable
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control
+WLAN"
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O
"Separate 4-line display,
illum.; 10m/30ft cable;
touch control"

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.6 WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
that have to be set for the WLAN configuration.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings

‣ WLAN settings

WLAN →  146

WLAN mode →  146

SSID name →  146

Network security →  146

Security identification →  146

User name →  146

WLAN password →  146

WLAN IP address →  146

WLAN passphrase →  146

Assign SSID name →  146

SSID name →  146

Endress+Hauser 145
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Connection state →  146

Received signal strength →  146

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

WLAN – Switch WLAN on and off. • Disable Enable

• Enable

WLAN mode – Select WLAN mode. • WLAN access WLAN access point
point
• WLAN Client

SSID name The client is activated. Enter the user-defined SSID – –

name (max. 32 characters).

Network security – Select the security type of the • Unsecured WPA2-PSK

WLAN network. • WPA2-PSK
• EAP-PEAP with
MSCHAPv2
• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 no
server authentic.
• EAP-TLS

Security identification – Select security settings and • Root certificate –

download these settings via • Device certificate
menu Data management > • Device private key
Security > WLAN.

User name – Enter user name. – –

WLAN password – Enter WLAN password. – –

WLAN IP address – Enter IP address of the device 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in 192.168.1.212
WLAN interface. the particular octet)

WLAN passphrase The WPA2-PSK option is Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit Serial number of the
selected in the Security type characters). character string measuring device
parameter. comprising numbers, (e.g. L100A802000)
 The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters
should be changed
during commissioning
for security reasons.

Assign SSID name – Select which name will be used • Device tag User-defined
for SSID: device tag or user- • User-defined
defined name.

SSID name • The User-defined option is Enter the user-defined SSID Max. 32-digit EH_device
selected in the Assign SSID name (max. 32 characters). character string designation_last 7
name parameter. comprising numbers, digits of the serial
• The WLAN access point  The user-defined SSID
name may only be letters and special number (e.g.
option is selected in the assigned once. If the SSID characters EH_Promass_300_A
WLAN mode parameter. 802000)
name is assigned more
than once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

Connection state – Displays the connection status. • Connected Not connected

• Not connected

Received signal strength – Shows the received signal • Low High

strength. • Medium
• High

146 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

10.6.7 Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup

‣ Configuration backup

Operating time →  147

Last backup →  147

Configuration management →  147

Backup state →  147

Comparison result →  147

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / Selection Factory setting

Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)

Last backup Shows when the last data backup was saved Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
to HistoROM backup. (m) and seconds (s)

Configuration management Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel Cancel
the HistoROM backup. • Execute backup
• Restore
• Compare
• Clear backup data

Backup state Shows the current status of data saving or • None None
restoring. • Backup in progress
• Restoring in progress
• Delete in progress
• Compare in progress
• Restoring failed
• Backup failed

Comparison result Comparison of current device data with • Settings identical Check not done
HistoROM backup. • Settings not identical
• No backup available
• Backup settings corrupt
• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Endress+Hauser 147
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter data
of the device.

Restore The last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes the
transmitter data of the device.

Compare The device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of the
device.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.6.8 Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that can be used for device administration purposes.

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration

‣ Administration

‣ Define access code →  148

‣ Reset access code →  149

Device reset →  149

Using the parameter to define the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code

Define access code →  149

Confirm access code →  149

148 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User entry

Define access code Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configuration Max. 16-digit character string comprising
of the device against unintentional changes. numbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code Confirm the entered access code. Max. 16-digit character string comprising
numbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code

Operating time →  149

Reset access code →  149

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface / User entry Factory setting

Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)

Reset access code Reset access code to factory settings. Character string comprising 0x00
numbers, letters and special
 For a reset code, contact your
Endress+Hauser service organization. characters

The reset code can only be entered via:

• Web browser
• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45)
• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description Selection Factory setting

Device reset Reset the device configuration - either • Cancel Cancel

entirely or in part - to a defined state. • To delivery settings
• Restart device
• Restore S-DAT backup

10.7 Simulation
The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).

Endress+Hauser 149
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation

‣ Simulation

Assign simulation process variable →  151

Process variable value →  151

Status input simulation →  151

Input signal level →  151

Current input 1 to n simulation →  152

Value current input 1 to n →  152

Current output 1 to n simulation →  152

Value current output 1 to n →  152

Frequency output simulation 1 to n →  152

Frequency value 1 to n →  152

Pulse output simulation 1 to n →  152

Pulse value 1 to n →  152

Switch output simulation 1 to n →  152

Switch status 1 to n →  152

Relay output 1 to n simulation →  152

Switch status 1 to n →  152

Device alarm simulation →  152

Diagnostic event category →  152

Diagnostic event simulation →  153

150 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Assign simulation process variable – Select a process variable for • Off Off
the simulation process that is • Mass flow
activated. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Target volume
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Weighted density
average
• Weighted
temperature
average
• Temperature
• Concentration *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Process variable value One of the following options is Enter the simulation value for Depends on the 0
selected in the Assign the selected process variable. process variable
simulation process variable selected
parameter (→  151):
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Concentration *
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Status input simulation – Switch simulation of the status • Off Off

input on and off. • On

Input signal level In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for the • High High
parameter, the On option is simulation of the status input. • Low
selected.

Endress+Hauser 151
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Current input 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the • Off Off

current input on and off. • On

Value current input 1 to n In the Current input 1 to n Enter the current value for 0 to 22.5 mA 0 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.

Current output 1 to n simulation – Switch the simulation of the • Off Off

current output on and off. • On

Value current output 1 to n In the Current output 1 to n Enter the current value for 3.59 to 22.5 mA 3.59 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.

Frequency output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Frequency frequency output on and off. • On
option is selected.

Frequency value 1 to n In the Frequency output Enter the frequency value for 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
simulation 1 to n parameter, the simulation.
the On option is selected.

Pulse output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
parameter, the Pulse option is output simulation. • Fixed value
selected. • Down-counting
 Pulse
For Fixed value option:
width parameter value
(→  105) defines the
pulse width of the pulses
output.

Pulse value 1 to n In the Pulse output Enter the number of pulses for 0 to 65 535 0
simulation 1 to n parameter, simulation.
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Switch output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Switch option switch output on and off. • On
is selected.

Switch status 1 to n – Select the status of the status • Open Open

output for the simulation. • Closed

Relay output 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the relay • Off Off

output on and off. • On

Switch status 1 to n The On option is selected in Select status of the relay • Open Open
the Switch output simulation output for the simulation. • Closed
1 to n parameter parameter.

Pulse output simulation – Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
output simulation. • Fixed value
• Down-counting
 For Fixed value option:
Pulse width parameter value
defines the pulse width
of the pulses output.

Pulse value In the Pulse output Set and switch off the pulse 0 to 65 535 0
simulation parameter, the output simulation.
Down-counting value option
is selected.

Device alarm simulation – Switch the device alarm on and • Off Off
off. • On

Diagnostic event category – Select a diagnostic event • Sensor Process

category. • Electronics
• Configuration
• Process

152 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Diagnostic event simulation – Select a diagnostic event to • Off Off

simulate this event. • Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Logging interval – Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s –

for data logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of the
measuring device from unintentional modification:
• Protect access to parameters via access code →  153
• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  60
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  154

10.8.1 Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:
• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are write-
protected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.

Defining the access code via local display

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  149).
2. Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  149) to
confirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressed
for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protected
parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  59.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display is
indicated by the →  59 Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation
→ Access status

Parameters which can always be modified via the local display

Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Endress+Hauser 153
Commissioning Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameters for configuring Parameters for configuring

the local display the totalizer

↓ ↓

Language Format display Control Totalizer

Contrast display Preset value

Display interval Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  149).
2. Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  149) to
confirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  59.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser is
indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access
status

Resetting the access code

If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code can
then be defined again afterwards.

Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.

1. Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  149).

2. Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined
→  153.

10.8.2 Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write access
to the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception
"Contrast display" parameter):
• Via local display
• Via EtherNet/IP protocol

154 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Commissioning

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed
→  156. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of the
parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX XX

A0029425

2. Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  156. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the header
of the operational display and in the navigation view.

Endress+Hauser 155
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

11 Operation

11.1 Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter

Operation → Locking status

Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter

Options Description

None The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  59. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) .

Temporarily locked Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once the
internal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2 Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:
• To configure the operating language →  91
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device
→  223

11.3 Configuring the display

Detailed information:
• On the basic settings for the local display →  117
• On the advanced settings for the local display →  135

11.4 Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values

‣ Measured values

‣ Measured variables →  157

‣ Input values →  159

‣ Output values →  160

‣ Totalizer →  158

156 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

11.4.1 "Measured variables" submenu

The Measured variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for each process variable.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Measured variables

‣ Measured variables

Mass flow →  157

Volume flow →  157

Corrected volume flow →  157

Density →  157

Reference density →  158

Temperature →  158

Pressure value →  158

Concentration →  158

Target mass flow →  158

Carrier mass flow →  158

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Mass flow – Displays the mass flow currently Signed floating-point

measured. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  94).

Volume flow – Displays the volume flow currently Signed floating-point

calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  94).

Corrected volume flow – Displays the corrected volume flow Signed floating-point
currently calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Corrected
volume flow unit parameter
(→  94).

Density – Shows the density currently measured. Signed floating-point

number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter (→  94).

Endress+Hauser 157
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Reference density – Displays the reference density currently Signed floating-point

calculated. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Reference
density unit parameter (→  95).

Temperature – Shows the medium temperature Signed floating-point

currently measured. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the
Temperature unit parameter
(→  95).

Pressure value – Displays either a fixed or external Signed floating-point

pressure value. number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Pressure
unit parameter (→  95).

Concentration For the following order code: Displays the concentration currently Signed floating-point
"Application package", option ED calculated. number
"Concentration" Dependency

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
The unit is taken from the
Concentration unit parameter.
Software option overview
parameter.

Target mass flow With the following conditions: Displays the target fluid mass flow Signed floating-point
• Order code for "Application package", currently measured. number
option ED "Concentration" Dependency
• The WT-% option or the User conc. The unit is taken from the Mass flow
option is selected in the unit parameter (→  94).
Concentration unit parameter.

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

Carrier mass flow With the following conditions: Displays the carrier fluid mass flow Signed floating-point
• Order code for "Application package", currently measured. number
option ED "Concentration" Dependency
• The WT-% option or the User conc. The unit is taken from the Mass flow
option is selected in the unit parameter (→  94).
Concentration unit parameter.

 The software options currently

enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer

‣ Totalizer

Totalizer value 1 to n →  159

Totalizer overflow 1 to n →  159

158 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Totalizer value 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer counter Signed floating-point
Assign process variable parameter value. number
(→  134) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.

Totalizer overflow 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer overflow. Integer with sign
Assign process variable parameter
(→  134) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.

11.4.3 "Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values

‣ Input values

‣ Current input 1 to n →  159

‣ Status input 1 to n →  159

Input values of current input

The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current input.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n

Measured values 1 to n →  159

Measured current 1 to n →  159

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Measured values 1 to n Displays the current input value. Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n Displays the current value of the current input. 0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input

The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every status input.

Endress+Hauser 159
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n

Value status input →  160

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Value status input Shows the current input signal level. • High
• Low

11.4.4 Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values

‣ Output values

‣ Current output 1 to n →  160

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  161

1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n →  161

Output values of current output

The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n

Output current 1 to n →  161

Measured current 1 to n →  161

160 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Output current 1 Displays the current value currently calculated for the current 3.59 to 22.5 mA
output.

Measured current Displays the current value currently measured for the current 0 to 30 mA
output.

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n

Output frequency 1 to n →  161

Pulse output 1 to n →  161

Switch status 1 to n →  161

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Output frequency 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Displays the value currently measured 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz
Frequency option is selected. for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Displays the pulse frequency currently Positive floating-point
Pulse option is selected. output. number

Switch status 1 to n The Switch option is selected in the Displays the current switch output • Open
Operating mode parameter. status. • Closed

Output values for relay output

The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every relay output.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

Switch status →  162

Switch cycles →  162

Max. switch cycles number →  162

Endress+Hauser 161
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface

Switch status Shows the current relay switch status. • Open

• Closed

Switch cycles Shows number of all performed switch cycles. Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles. Positive integer

11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process

conditions
The following are available for this purpose:
• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  92)
• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  130)

11.6 Performing a totalizer reset

Navigation
"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling

‣ Totalizer handling

Control Totalizer 1 to n →  163

Preset value 1 to n →  163

Reset all totalizers →  163

162 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry

Control Totalizer 1 to n One of the following options is Control totalizer value. • Totalize Totalize
selected in the Assign process • Reset + hold
variable parameter • Preset + hold
(→  134) of the Totalizer • Reset + totalize
1 to n submenu: • Preset + totalize
• Volume flow • Hold
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Preset value 1 to n One of the following options is Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Assign process number • 0 kg
Dependency
variable parameter • 0 lb
(→  134) of the Totalizer
1 to n submenu:
 The unit of the selected
process variable is
• Volume flow specified for the totalizer
• Mass flow in the Unit totalizer
• Corrected volume flow parameter (→  134).
• Target mass flow *
• Carrier mass flow *

Reset all totalizers – Reset all totalizers to 0 and • Cancel Cancel

start. • Reset + totalize

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options Description

Totalize The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.

Preset + totalize The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter and
the totaling process is restarted.

Hold Totalizing is stopped.

11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7 Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for the
measured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  71.
• Web browser

Endress+Hauser 163
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Function range
• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored
• 4 logging channels
• Adjustable logging interval for data logging
• Display of the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart

/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.77

40.69 kg/h
-100s 0

A0016357

 26 Chart of a measured value trend

• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to the
ongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to the
channels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging

‣ Data logging

Assign channel 1 →  166

Assign channel 2 →  167

Assign channel 3 →  167

Assign channel 4 →  167

Logging interval →  167

Clear logging data →  167

Data logging →  167

Logging delay →  167

Data logging control →  167

Data logging status →  168

Entire logging duration →  168

‣ Display channel 1

‣ Display channel 2

164 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

‣ Display channel 3

‣ Display channel 4

Endress+Hauser 165
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Assign channel 1 The Extended HistoROM Assign a process variable to • Off Off
application package is logging channel. • Mass flow
available. • Volume flow
• Corrected volume
 The software options
currently enabled are flow
• Target mass flow *
displayed in the
• Carrier mass flow *
Software option
• Target volume
overview parameter.
flow
• Carrier volume
flow
• Target corrected
volume flow
• Carrier corrected
volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Reference density
alternative
• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative
• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative
• S&W volume flow
• Water cut
• Oil density
• Water density
• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water volume flow
• Oil corrected
volume flow
• Water corrected
volume flow
• Concentration *
• Dynamic viscosity
• Kinematic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
dynamic viscosity
• Temp.
compensated
kinematic viscosity
• Temperature
• Carrier pipe
temperature *
• Electronic
temperature
• Oscillation
frequency 0
• Oscillation
frequency 1
• Oscillation
amplitude *
• Oscillation
amplitude 1
• Frequency
fluctuation 0
• Frequency
fluctuation 1
• Oscillation
damping 0

166 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Operation

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface
• Oscillation
damping 1
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0
• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0
• Exciter current 1
• HBSI
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Current output 3 *
• Pressure

Assign channel 2 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  166)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Assign channel 3 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  166)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Assign channel 4 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to Picklist, see Assign Off
application package is logging channel. channel 1 parameter
available. (→  166)

 The software options

currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Logging interval The Extended HistoROM Define the logging interval for 0.1 to 3 600.0 s 1.0 s
application package is data logging. This value
available. defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

Clear logging data The Extended HistoROM Clear the entire logging data. • Cancel Cancel
application package is • Clear data
available.

Data logging – Select the data logging • Overwriting Overwriting

method. • Not overwriting

Logging delay In the Data logging Enter the time delay for 0 to 999 h 0h
parameter, the Not measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.

Data logging control In the Data logging Start and stop measured value • None None
parameter, the Not logging. • Delete + start
overwriting option is selected. • Stop

Endress+Hauser 167
Operation Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

entry / User
interface

Data logging status In the Data logging Displays the measured value • Done Done
parameter, the Not logging status. • Delay active
overwriting option is selected. • Active
• Stopped

Entire logging duration In the Data logging Displays the total logging Positive floating- 0s
parameter, the Not duration. point number
overwriting option is selected.

* Visibility depends on order options or device settings

168 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1 General troubleshooting

For local display
Error Possible causes Solution

Local display dark and no output Supply voltage does not match the Apply the correct supply voltage .
signals value indicated on the nameplate.

Local display dark and no output The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
signals wrong.

Local display dark and no output No contact between connecting Check the connection of the cables
signals cables and terminals. and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output Terminals are not plugged into the Check terminals.
signals I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into the
main electronics module correctly.

Local display dark and no output I/O electronics module is defective. Order spare part →  200.
signals Main electronics module is
defective.

Local display is dark, but signal Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter by
output is within the valid range simultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker by
simultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal The cable of the display module is Insert the plug correctly into the
output is within the valid range not plugged in correctly. main electronics module and
display module.

Local display is dark, but signal Display module is defective. Order spare part →  200.
output is within the valid range

Backlighting of local display is red Diagnostic event with "Alarm" Take remedial measures
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Text on local display appears in a Incorrect operating language is 1. Press  +  for 2 s ("home
foreign language and cannot be configured. position").
understood. 2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter
(→  144).

Message on local display: Communication between the • Check the cable and the
"Communication Error" display module and the electronics connector between the main
"Check Electronics" is interrupted. electronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  200.

For output signals

Error Possible causes Solution

Signal output outside the valid Main electronics module is Order spare part →  200.
range defective.

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error Check and correct the parameter
display, but signal output is configuration.
incorrect, though in the valid range.

Device measures incorrectly. Configuration error or device is 1. Check and correct parameter
operated outside the application. configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified in
the "Technical Data".

Endress+Hauser 169
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

For access
Error Possible causes Solution

No write access to parameters Hardware write protection enabled Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  154.

No write access to parameters Current user role has limited access 1. Check user role →  59.
authorization 2. Enter correct customer-specific
access code →  59.

No connection via EtherNet/IP Device plug connected incorrectly Check the pin assignment of the
connector .

Not connecting to Web server Web server disabled Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it if
necessary→  67.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet 1. Check the properties of the

interface of the computer Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  63.
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

Not connecting to Web server • Incorrect IP address 1. If addressing via hardware: open
• IP address is not known the transmitter and check the IP
address configured (last octet).
2. Check the IP address of the
measuring device with the network
manager.
3. If the IP address is not known,
set DIP switch no. 10 to ON, restart
the device and enter the factory IP
address 192.168.1.212.

 EtherNet/IP communication
is interrupted by enabling the
DIP switch.

Web browser setting "Use a Proxy Disable the use of the proxy server
Server for Your LAN" is enabled in the Web browser settings of the
computer.
Using the example of MS Internet
Explorer:
1. Under Control Panel open
Internet options.
2. Select the Connections tab and
then double-click LAN settings.
3. In the LAN settings disable the
use of the proxy server and select
OK to confirm.

Apart from the active network • Make sure that no other network
connection to the measuring device, connections are established by
other network connections are also the computer (also no WLAN)
being used. and close other programs with
network access to the computer.
• If using a docking station for
notebooks, make sure that a
network connection to another
network is not active.

Not connecting to Web server Incorrect WLAN access data • Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device and
operating device .

WLAN communication disabled –

170 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Error Possible causes Solution

Not connecting to Web server, No WLAN network available • Check if WLAN reception is
FieldCare or DeviceCare present: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection is
enabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or WLAN network is weak. • Operating device is outside of
unstable reception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet • Check network settings.

communication • Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Web browser frozen and operation Data transfer active Wait until data transfer or current
no longer possible action is finished.

Connection lost 1. Check cable connection and

power supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser and
restart if necessary.

Content of Web browser Not using optimum version of Web 1. Use the correct Web browser
incomplete or difficult to read server. version .
2. Clear the Web browser cache and
restart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings. Change the font size/display ratio

of the Web browser.

No or incomplete display of • JavaScript not enabled 1. Enable JavaScript.

contents in the Web browser • JavaScript cannot be enabled 2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or Firewall of computer or network is Depending on the settings of the
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service preventing communication firewall used on the computer or in
interface (port 8000) the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network is Depending on the settings of the
or DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service preventing communication firewall used on the computer or in
interface (via port 8000 or TFTP the network, the firewall must be
ports) adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1 Transmitter
Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

Endress+Hauser 171
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

1 2 3 4 5

A0029629

1 Supply voltage
2 Device status
3 network status
4 Port 1 active: EtherNet/IP
5 Port 2 active: EtherNet/IP and service interface (CDI)

LED Color Meaning

1 Supply voltage Off Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green Supply voltage is ok.

2 Device status/module Off Firmware error.

status
Green Device status is ok.

Flashing green Device is not configured.

Flashing red A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic

behavior has occurred.

Red A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior

has occurred.

Flashing red/green The device restarts/self-test.

3 Network status Off The device does not have an EtherNet/IP address.

Green EtherNet/IP connection is active.

Flashing green The device has an Ethernet/IP address but no

EtherNet/IP connection is active.

Red The EtherNet/IP address of the device has been

assigned twice.

Flashing red EtherNet/IP connection is in the "time out" mode.

Flashing red/green The device restarts/self-test.

4 Port 1 active: Off Not connected or no connection established.

Ethernet/IP
White Connected and connection established.

Flashing white Communication not active.

5 Port 2 active: Off Not connected or no connection established.

Ethernet/IP and
service interface (CDI) Yellow Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow Communication not active.

172 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3 Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1 Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a
diagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.

Operational display in alarm condition Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S

20.50 S801
Supply voltage
3
4

X XX i Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1 Status signal
2 Diagnostic behavior
3 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
4 Short text
5 Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of the
diagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:
• Via parameter
• Via submenus →  193

Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M
= Maintenance Required

Symbol Meaning

Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).

Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)

Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser 173
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic behavior

Symbol Meaning

Alarm
• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.

Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

Diagnostic information

Diagnostic code

Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example 842 Process limit

A0013962 A0013958

NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107

Operating elements

Key Meaning

Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.

Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

174 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures

XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S

20.50 S801
Supply voltage

X XX i Menu

1.

Diagnostic list S
Diagnostics 1
1 S801 Supply voltage
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3

2.

2 Supply voltage (ID:203) 3

4 S801 0d00h02m25s 5
Increase supply voltage
6

3.

A0029431-EN

 27 Message about remedial measures

1 Diagnostic information
2 Short text
3 Service ID
4 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
5 Operation time of occurrence
6 Remedial measures

1. The user is in the diagnostic message.

Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.
2. Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.
3. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1. Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.
2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on the
home page once the user has logged on.

Endress+Hauser 175
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

2 3
A0031056

1 Status area with status signal

2 Diagnostic information →  174
3 Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via parameter
• Via submenu →  193

Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).

Symbol Meaning

Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).

Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)

Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event and
the related diagnostic information.

12.5 Diagnostic information in DeviceCare or FieldCare

12.5.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the
operating tool once the connection has been established.

176 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status signal: Function check (C)

Xxxxxx
P Diagnostics 1: C485 Simu...
P Remedy information: Deactivate...
P Access status tooling: Mainenance Failure (F)

+ Operation Function check (C) 2

+ Setup Diagnostics 1: C485 Simulation measured vari...
+ Diagnostics Remedy information: Deactivate Simulation (Service...
+ Expert
Out of spezification (S) 3
Maintenance required (M)

A0021799-EN

1 Status area with status signal→  173

2 Diagnostic information→  174
3 Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via parameter
• Via submenu →  193

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

Diagnostic information

Diagnostic code

Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number

↓ ↓ ↓

Example 842 Process limit

A0013962 A0013958

NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107

12.5.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly:
• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.

Endress+Hauser 177
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

1. Call up the desired parameter.
2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

12.6 Diagnostic information via communication interface

12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information

The current diagnostic event and associated diagnostic information can be read out via the
input assembly (fix assembly):

Bytes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

↓ ↓ ↓

Diagnostic number
of the diagnostic
event that is
"Empty" or "Padding displayed in the
Content "Empty" or "Reserved"
bytes" Actual
diagnostics
parameter , e.g.
242

For the content of bytes 8 to 16

12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information

12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at the
factory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:

Options Description

Alarm The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. A
diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.

Warning The device continues to measure. The totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is
generated.

Logbook entry only The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Event
logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with the
operational display.

Off The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.

178 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.8 Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can be
changed. Change the diagnostic information →  178

12.8.1 Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

022 Temperature sensor defective 1. Check or replace sensor • 0x10000BE

electronic module (ISEM) • 0x10000BF
Status signal F 2. If available: Check connection • 0x10000D5
cable between sensor and • 0x10000D6
Diagnostic behavior Alarm transmitter
3. Replace sensor

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

046 Sensor limit exceeded 1. Inspect sensor • 0x80000C8

2. Check process condition • 0x80000CA
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Alarm

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

062 Sensor connection faulty 1. Check or replace sensor • 0x10000DB

electronic module (ISEM) • 0x10000DC
Status signal F 2. If available: Check connection • 0x1000113
cable between sensor and • 0x1000114
Diagnostic behavior Alarm transmitter
3. Replace sensor

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

063 Exciter current faulty 1. Check or replace sensor 0x80002B3

electronic module (ISEM)
Status signal S 2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor and
Diagnostic behavior Alarm transmitter
3. Replace sensor

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

082 Data storage 1. Check module connections 0x10000E7

2. Contact service
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Endress+Hauser 179
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

083 Memory content 1. Restart device 0x10000A0

2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup
Status signal F ('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT
Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

140 Sensor signal asymmetrical 1. Check or replace sensor 0x80000CC

electronic module (ISEM)
Status signal S 2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor and
Diagnostic behavior [from the Alarm transmitter
factory] 1) 3. Replace sensor

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

144 Measuring error too high 1. Check or change sensor 0x10001C7

2. Check process conditions
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior [from the Alarm

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

12.8.2 Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

201 Device failure 1. Restart device 0x100014B

2. Contact service
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

242 Software incompatible 1. Check software 0x1000067

2. Flash or change main electronics
Status signal F module

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

252 Modules incompatible 1. Check electronic modules 0x100006B

2. Change electronic modules
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

180 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

252 Modules incompatible 1. Check if correct electronic modul 0x10002C0

is plugged
Status signal F 2. Replace electronic module

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

262 Sensor electronic connection faulty 1. Check or replace connection 0x1000149

cable between sensor electronic
Status signal F module (ISEM) and main
electronics
Diagnostic behavior Alarm 2. Check or replace ISEM or main
electronics

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

270 Main electronic failure Change main electronic module • 0x1000078

• 0x100007C
Status signal F • 0x1000080
• 0x100009F
Diagnostic behavior Alarm • 0x10002D7

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

271 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device 0x100007D

2. Change main electronic module
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

272 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device 0x1000079

2. Contact service
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

273 Main electronic failure Change electronic • 0x1000098

• 0x10000E5
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Endress+Hauser 181
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

275 I/O module 1 to n defective Change I/O module 0x100007A

Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device • 0x100007B

2. Change I/O module • 0x1000081
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

283 Memory content 1. Reset device • 0x10000E1

2. Contact service • 0x100016F
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

302 Device verification active Device verification active, please 0x20001EE

wait.
Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

311 Electronic failure 1. Do not reset device 0x40000E2

2. Contact service
Status signal M

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed Replace user interface board 0x10002C7
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

182 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device 0x1000095

2. Check electronic modules
Status signal F 3. Change I/O Modul or main
electronics
Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty 1. Restart device • 0x10000A1

2. Check if failure recurs • 0x10000C7
Status signal F 3. Replace sensor electronic module • 0x10000C9
(ISEM) • 0x10000D4
Diagnostic behavior Alarm • 0x10000DA
• 0x1000120
• 0x10002CB
• 0x10002CC
• 0x10002CD
• 0x10002CE
• 0x10002CF
• 0x10002D0

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty 1. Transfer data or reset device 0x10002D1
2. Contact service
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

374 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty 1. Restart device 0x80000CE

2. Check if failure recurs
Status signal S 3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)
Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning
factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed 1. Restart device 0x1000107

2. Check if failure recurs
Status signal F 3. Replace module rack inclusive
electronic modules
Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Endress+Hauser 183
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

382 Data storage 1. Insert T-DAT 0x100016D

2. Replace T-DAT
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

383 Memory content 1. Restart device 0x100016E

2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
Status signal F parameter
3. Replace T-DAT
Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

387 HistoROM backup failed Contact service organization 0x1000288

Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

12.8.3 Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed 1. Apply I/O module configuration 0x400026C

(parameter 'Apply I/O
Status signal M configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device
Diagnostic behavior Warning description and check wiring

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

330 Flash file invalid 1. Update firmware of device 0x40002C9

2. Restart device
Status signal M

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

331 Firmware update failed 1. Update firmware of device 0x10002CA

2. Restart device
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Warning

184 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

410 Data transfer 1. Check connection 0x100008B

2. Retry data transfer
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

412 Processing download Download active, please wait 0x2000204

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

431 Trim 1 to n Carry out trim 0x2000004

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

437 Configuration incompatible 1. Restart device 0x1000060

2. Contact service
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

438 Dataset 1. Check data set file 0x400006A

2. Check device configuration
Status signal M 3. Up- and download new
configuration
Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

441 Current output 1 to n 1. Check process • 0x8000099

2. Check current output settings • 0x80000B6
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Endress+Hauser 185
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

442 Frequency output 1 to n 1. Check process • 0x800008A

2. Check frequency output settings • 0x8000122
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

443 Pulse output 1 to n 1. Check process • 0x800008C

2. Check pulse output settings • 0x8000121
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

444 Current input 1 to n 1. Check process 0x80001EB

2. Check current input settings
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

453 Flow override Deactivate flow override 0x2000094

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

484 Failure mode simulation Deactivate simulation 0x2000090

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

485 Measured variable simulation Deactivate simulation 0x2000093

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

186 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation Deactivate simulation 0x20001EC

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation Deactivate simulation 0x200000E

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n Deactivate simulation frequency 0x200008D

output
Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n Deactivate simulation pulse output 0x200008E

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

494 Switch output simulation 1 to n Deactivate simulation switch output 0x200008F

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation Deactivate simulation 0x200015E

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Endress+Hauser 187
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

496 Status input simulation Deactivate simulation status input 0x2000170

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid 1. Check I/O hardware 0x1000276

configuration
Status signal F 2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
Diagnostic behavior Alarm output on correct slot

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

528 Concentration settings faulty 1. Check concentration settings 0x8000387

2. Check input values e.g. pressure,
Status signal S temperature

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

529 Concentration settings faulty 1. Check concentration settings 0x8000389

2. Check input values e.g. pressure,
Status signal S temperature

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

537 Configuration 1. Check IP addresses in network 0x100014A

2. Change IP address
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

594 Relay output simulation Deactivate simulation switch output 0x20002BA

Status signal C

Diagnostic behavior Warning

188 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.8.4 Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

803 Current loop 1. Check wiring 0x10000AD

2. Change I/O module
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

830 Sensor temperature too high Reduce ambient temp. around the 0x80000C0
sensor housing
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

831 Sensor temperature too low Increase ambient temp. around the 0x80000C2
sensor housing
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

832 Electronic temperature too high Reduce ambient temperature • 0x80000C3

• 0x80002D4
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

833 Electronic temperature too low Increase ambient temperature • 0x80000C1

• 0x80002D3
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser 189
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

834 Process temperature too high Reduce process temperature 0x80000C5

Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

835 Process temperature too low Increase process temperature 0x80000C6

Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

842 Process limit Low flow cut off active! 0x8000091

1. Check low flow cut off
Status signal S configuration

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

862 Partly filled pipe 1. Check for gas in process 0x8000092

2. Adjust detection limits
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

882 Input signal 1. Check input configuration • 0x1000031

2. Check external device or process • 0x1000257
Status signal F conditions

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

910 Tubes not oscillating 1. Check electronic 0x1000050

2. Inspect sensor
Status signal F

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

190 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

912 Medium inhomogeneous 1. Check process cond. • 0x80000C4

2. Increase system pressure • 0x80000DF
Status signal S • 0x8000115
• 0x8000162
Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning
factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

913 Medium unsuitable 1. Check process conditions 0x80000CD

2. Check electronic modules or
Status signal S sensor

Diagnostic behavior [from the Alarm

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

941 API temperature out of specification 1. Check process temperature with 0x8000380
selected API commodity group
Status signal S 2. Check API related parameters

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

942 API density out of specification 1. Check process density with 0x800033B
selected API commodity group
Status signal S 2. Check API related parameters

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

943 API pressure out of specification 1. Check process pressure with 0x800037F
selected API commodity group
Status signal S 2. Check API related parameters

Diagnostic behavior Alarm

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

944 Monitoring failed Check process conditions for 0x80001C6

Heartbeat Monitoring
Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior [from the Warning

factory] 1)

1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser 191
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information Remedy instructions Coding of diagnostic

information (hex)
No. Short text

948 Oscillation damping too high Check process conditions 0x8000168

Status signal S

Diagnostic behavior Warning

12.9 Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and the
previous diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:
• Via local display →  175
• Via Web browser →  176
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  177
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  177
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu
→  193

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

Actual diagnostics →  192

Previous diagnostics →  192

Operating time from restart →  192

Operating time →  192

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface

Actual diagnostics A diagnostic event has occurred. Shows the current occured diagnostic Symbol for diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
information. and short message.

 Ifsimultaneously,
two or more messages occur
the message with
the highest priority is shown on
the display.

Previous diagnostics Two diagnostic events have already Shows the diagnostic event that Symbol for diagnostic
occurred. occurred prior to the current diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
event along with its diagnostic and short message.
information.

Operating time from restart – Shows the time the device has been in Days (d), hours (h),
operation since the last device restart. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

Operating time – Indicates how long the device has been Days (d), hours (h),
in operation. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

192 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.10 Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list

/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3

A0014006-EN

 28 Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:

• Via local display →  175
• Via Web browser →  176
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  177
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  177

12.11 Event logbook

12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook

A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list

/ ../Eventlist F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure

A0014008-EN

 29 Taking the example of the local display

• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.

• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:
• Diagnostic events →  179
• Information events →  194

Endress+Hauser 193
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbol
that indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:
• Diagnostic event
– : Occurrence of the event
– : End of the event
• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:
• Via local display →  175
• Via Web browser →  176
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  177
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  177
For filtering the displayed event messages →  194

12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook

Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message is
displayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories
• All
• Failure (F)
• Function check (C)
• Out of specification (S)
• Maintenance required (M)
• Information (I)

12.11.3 Overview of information events

Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only and
not in the diagnostic list.

Info number Info name

I1000 --------(Device ok)

I1079 Sensor changed

I1089 Power on

I1090 Configuration reset

I1091 Configuration changed

I1092 HistoROM backup deleted

I1111 Density adjust failure

I1137 Electronic changed

I1151 History reset

I1155 Reset electronic temperature

I1156 Memory error trend

I1157 Memory error event list

I1184 Display connected

I1209 Density adjustment ok

I1221 Zero point adjust failure

I1222 Zero point adjustment ok

194 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info number Info name

I1256 Display: access status changed

I1278 I/O module reset detected

I1335 Firmware changed

I1361 Web server: login failed

I1397 Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398 CDI: access status changed

I1444 Device verification passed

I1445 Device verification failed

I1447 Record application reference data

I1448 Application reference data recorded

I1449 Recording application ref. data failed

I1450 Monitoring off

I1451 Monitoring on

I1457 Measured error verification failed

I1459 I/O module verification failed

I1460 HBSI verification failed

I1461 Sensor verification failed

I1462 Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512 Download started

I1513 Download finished

I1514 Upload started

I1515 Upload finished

I1618 I/O module 2 replaced

I1619 I/O module 3 replaced

I1621 I/O module 4 replaced

I1622 Calibration changed

I1624 Reset all totalizers

I1625 Write protection activated

I1626 Write protection deactivated

I1627 Web server: login successful

I1628 Display: login successful

I1629 CDI: login successful

I1631 Web server access changed

I1632 Display: login failed

I1633 CDI: login failed

I1634 Reset to factory settings

I1635 Reset to delivery settings

I1639 Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649 Hardware write protection activated

I1650 Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712 New flash file received

I1725 Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726 Configuration backup failed

Endress+Hauser 195
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

12.12 Resetting the measuring device

Using theDevice reset parameter (→  149) it is possible to reset the entire device
configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.

12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter

Options Description

Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is reset
to this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory
setting.

Restart device The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM)
to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from the
electronics memory to the S-DAT.

12.13 Device information

The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.

Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Device information

‣ Device information

Device tag →  197

Serial number →  197

Firmware version →  197

Device name →  197

Order code →  197

Extended order code 1 →  197

Extended order code 2 →  197

Extended order code 3 →  197

ENP version →  197

196 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Parameter overview with brief description

Parameter Description User interface Factory setting

Device tag Shows name of measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promass
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring A maximum of 11-digit –
device. character string comprising
letters and numbers.

Firmware version Shows the device firmware version installed. Character string in the format –
xx.yy.zz

Device name Shows the name of the transmitter. Promass300/500 –

 The name can be found on the

nameplate of the transmitter.

Order code Shows the device order code. Character string composed of –
letters, numbers and certain
 The order code can be found on the
nameplate of the sensor and punctuation marks (e.g. /).
transmitter in the "Order code" field.

Extended order code 1 Shows the 1st part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2 Shows the 2nd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3 Shows the 3rd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version Shows the version of the electronic Character string 2.02.00
nameplate (ENP).

Endress+Hauser 197
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

12.14 Firmware history

Release Firmware Order code Firmware Documentation Documentation
date version for changes type
"Firmware
version"

10.2017 01.00.zz Option 77 Original firmware Operating BA01734D

Instructions

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:
• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →
Downloads
• Specify the following details:
– Product root: e.g. 8S 3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on the
device.
– Text search: Manufacturer's information
– Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

198 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Maintenance

13 Maintenance

13.1 Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not
attack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2 Interior cleaning

Observe the following points for CIP and SIP cleaning:
• Use only cleaning agents to which the process-wetted materials are adequately resistant.
• Observe the maximum permitted medium temperature for the measuring device
→  218.
Observe the following point for cleaning with pigs:
Observe the inside diameter of the measuring tube and process connection.

13.2 Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  202

13.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

Endress+Hauser 199
Repairs Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

14 Repairs

14.1 General notes

14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:
• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:
‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.
‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2 Spare parts

W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here and
can be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:
• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  197) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4 Return
The measuring device must be returned if it is need of repair or a factory calibration, or if
the wrong measuring device has been delivered or ordered. Legal specifications require
Endress+Hauser, as an ISO-certified company, to follow certain procedures when handling
products that are in contact with the medium.
To ensure safe, swift and professional device returns, please refer to the procedure and
conditions for returning devices provided on the Endress+Hauser website at
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

200 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Repairs

14.5 Disposal

14.5.1 Removing the measuring device

1. Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, high
temperatures or aggressive fluids.

2. Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe the
safety instructions.

14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that are
hazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.

Observe the following notes during disposal:

‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

Endress+Hauser 201
Accessories Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

15 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress
+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question is
available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the
Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1 Device-specific accessories

15.1.1 For the transmitter

Accessories Description

Transmitter Promass300 Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:
• Approvals
• Output
• Input
• Display / operation
• Housing
• Software

 Order code: 8X3BXX

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA01150
Remote display and • If ordered directly with the measuring device:
operating module Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Separate 4-line display, illum.;
DKX001 10 m (30 ft)Cable; touch control".
• If ordered separately:
– Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "None,
prepared for separate display".
– DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001.
• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001.
Mounting bracket for DKX001
• Ordered directly with the DKX001:
Order code for "Enclosed accessories", option RA "Mounting bracket, 1"/2" pipe".
• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  224.

 For details, see Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna External WLAN antenna with 2 m (6.6 ft)connecting cable and two angle brackets.
Order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8 "Wireless antenna wide area".

 Further information on the WLAN interface →  70.

Protective cover Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA01160

202 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Accessories

15.1.2 For the sensor

Accessories Description

Heating jacket Is used to stabilize the temperature of the fluids in the sensor.
Water, water vapor and other non-corrosive liquids are permitted for use as fluids.
If using oil as a heating medium, please consult with Endress+Hauser.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA00099D

15.2 Communication-specific accessories

Accessories Description

Field Xpert SFX350 Field Xpert SFX350 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for and can be used in non-
hazardous areas.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S

Field Xpert SFX370 Field Xpert SFX370 is a mobile computer for commissioning and maintenance. It
enables efficient device configuration and diagnostics for and can be used in the
non-hazardous area and in the hazardous area.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S

15.3 Service-specific accessories

Accessories Description

Applicator Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:

• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements
• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter: e.g.
nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results
• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation and
access to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of a
project.
Applicator is available:
• Via the Internet: https://wapps.endress.com/applicator
• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M W@M Life Cycle Management

Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a plant
and its components is generated from the first stages of planning and during the
asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform with
online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth data
shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes and
increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.

It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage them. By
using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their
status and condition.

 For details, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

DeviceCare Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.

 For details, see Innovation brochure IN01047S

Endress+Hauser 203
Accessories Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

15.4 System components

Accessories Description

Memograph M graphic The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevant
data manager measured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are
monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.

 BA00247R
For details, see "Technical Information" TI00133R and Operating Instructions

Cerabar M The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.

 For details, see "Technical Information" TI00426P, TI00436P and Operating

Instructions BA00200P, BA00382P

Cerabar S The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.

 BA00271P
For details, see "Technical Information" TI00383P and Operating Instructions

iTEMP The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable for
the measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in the
medium temperature.

 For details, see "Fields of Activity", FA00006T

204 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

16 Technical data

16.1 Application
The measuring device is suitable for flow measurement of liquids only.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use the
measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2 Function and system design

Measuring principle Mass flow measurement based on the Coriolis measuring principle

Measuring system The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.

The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  15

Endress+Hauser 205
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

16.3 Input

Measured variable Direct measured variables

• Mass flow
• Density
• Temperature

Calculated measured variables

• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Reference density

Measuring range Measuring ranges for liquids

DN Measuring range full scale values min(F) to max(F)

[mm] [in] [kg/h] [lb/min]

8 ³⁄₈ 0 to 2 000 0 to 73.50

15 ½ 0 to 6 500 0 to 238.9

25 1 0 to 18 000 0 to 661.5

40 1½ 0 to 45 000 0 to 1 654

50 2 0 to 70 000 0 to 2 573

Recommended measuring range

"Flow limit" section →  220

Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1.

Flow rates above the preset full scale value do not override the electronics unit, with the
result that the totalizer values are registered correctly.

Input signal External measured values

To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables, the automation system can
continuously write various measured values to the measuring device:
• Operating pressure to increase accuracy (Endress+Hauser recommends the use of a
pressure measuring device for absolute pressure, e.g. Cerabar M or Cerabar S)
• Medium temperature to increase accuracy (e.g. iTEMP)
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be ordered
from Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  204

Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  207.

Digital communication
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
EtherNet/IP.

206 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Current input 0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span • 4 to 20 mA (active)

• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution 1 µA

Voltage drop Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage ≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage ≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables • Pressure

• Temperature
• Density

Status input

Maximum input values • DC –3 to 30 V

• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time Adjustable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level • Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V

• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions • Off

• Reset the individual totalizers separately
• Reset all totalizers
• Flow override

Endress+Hauser 207
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

16.4 Output

Output signal EtherNet/IP

Standards In accordance with IEEE 802.3

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

Maximum output values 22.5 mA

Current span Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA (active)
• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

 Ex-i, passive
Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive)

Load 0 to 700 Ω

Resolution 0.38 µA

Damping Adjustable: 0.07 to 999 s

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Pulse/frequency/switch output

Function Can be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

Version Open collector

Can be set to:
• Active
• Passive

 Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width Adjustable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate 10 000 Impulse/s

208 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Pulse value Adjustable

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping Adjustable: 0 to 999 s

Pulse/pause ratio 1:1

Assignable measured • Mass flow

variables • Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density
• Reference density
• Temperature
• Electronic temperature
• Oscillation frequency 0
• Oscillation damping 0
• Signal asymmetry
• Exciter current 0

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Switch output

Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay Adjustable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switching Unlimited

cycles

Assignable functions • Off

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value
– Mass flow
– Volume flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Density
– Reference density
– Temperature
– Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
– Partially filled pipe detection
– Low flow cut off

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

Relay output

Function Switch output

Version Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior Can be set to:

• NO (normally open), factory setting
• NC (normally closed)

Endress+Hauser 209
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Maximum switching • DC 30 V, 0.1 A

capacity (passive) • AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions • Off

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value
– Mass flow
– Volume flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Density
– Reference density
– Temperature
– Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
– Partially filled pipe detection
– Low flow cut off

 The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
application packages.

User configurable input/output

One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurable
I/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:
• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Pulse/frequency/switch output
• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Status input
The technical values correspond to those of the inputs and outputs described in this
section.

Signal on alarm Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:

EtherNet/IP

Device diagnostics Device condition can be read out in Input Assembly

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA
Failure mode Choose from:
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US
• Min. value: 3.59 mA
• Max. value: 22.5 mA
• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA
• Actual value
• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode Choose from:
• Maximum alarm: 22 mA
• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

210 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Pulse/frequency/switch output

Pulse output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Actual value
• No pulses

Frequency output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Actual value
• 0 Hz
• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Current status
• Open
• Closed

Relay output

Failure mode Choose from:

• Current status
• Open
• Closed

Local display

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107

Interface/protocol
• Via digital communication:
EtherNet/IP
• Via service interface
– CDI-RJ45 service interface
– WLAN interface

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Web server

Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures

Endress+Hauser 211
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Status information Status indicated by various light emitting diodes

The following information is displayed depending on the device version:
• Supply voltage active
• Data transmission active
• Device alarm/error has occurred
• EtherNet/IP network available
• EtherNet/IP connection established

 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

Low flow cut off The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data Protocol • The CIP Networks Library Volume 1: Common Industrial Protocol
• The CIP Networks Library Volume 2: EtherNet/IP Adaptation of CIP

Communication type • 10Base-T

• 100Base-TX

Device profile Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

Manufacturer ID 0x11

Device type ID 0x103B

Baud rates Automatic ¹⁰⁄₁₀₀ Mbit with half-duplex and full-duplex detection

Polarity Auto-polarity for automatic correction of crossed TxD and RxD pairs

Supported CIP connections Max. 3 connections

Explicit connections Max. 6 connections

I/O connections Max. 6 connections (scanner)

Configuration options for • DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing
measuring device • Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare)
• Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems
• Web browser
• Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) integrated in the measuring device

Configuration of the EtherNet • Speed: 10 MBit, 100 MBit, auto (factory setting)
interface • Duplex: half-duplex, full-duplex, auto (factory setting)

Configuration of the device • DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing (last octet)
address • DHCP
• Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare)
• Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems
• Web browser
• EtherNet/IP tools, e.g. RSLinx (Rockwell Automation)

Device Level Ring (DLR) Yes

System integration Information regarding system integration →  75.

• Cyclic data transmission
• Block model
• Input and output groups

16.5 Power supply

Terminal assignment →  33

212 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Device plugs available →  33

Pin assignment, device plug →  33

Supply voltage Order code for terminal voltage Frequency range

"Power supply"

Option D DC24 V ±20% –

Option E AC100 to 240 V –15…+10% 50/60 Hz

DC24 V ±20% –
Option I
AC100 to 240 V –15…+10% 50/60 Hz

Power consumption Transmitter

Max. 10 W (active power)

Current consumption Transmitter

• Max. 400 mA (24 V)
• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure • Totalizers stop at the last value measured.

• Configuration is retained in the plug-in memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Electrical connection →  34

Potential equalization →  40

terminals Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries • Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Thread for cable entry:
– NPT ½"
– G ½"
– M20
• Device plug for digital communication: M12

Cable specification →  30

16.6 Performance characteristics

reference operating • Error limits based on ISO 11631

conditions • Water with +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F) at2 to 6 bar (29 to 87 psi)
• Specifications as per calibration protocol
• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs that are traced to ISO 17025.
To obtain measured errors, use the Applicator sizing tool →  203

Endress+Hauser 213
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Maximum measured error o.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm³ = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature

Base accuracy
Design fundamentals →  217

Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)

±0.10 % o.r.

Density (liquids)

Under Standard density Wide-range

reference operating conditions calibration 1) Density specification 2) 3)

[g/cm³] [g/cm³] [g/cm³]

±0.0005 ±0.01 ±0.002

1) Valid over the entire temperature and density range

2) Valid range for special density calibration: 0 to 2 g/cm³, +10 to +80 °C (+50 to +176 °F)
3) Order code for "Application package", option EF "Special density"

Temperature
±0.5 °C ± 0.005 · T °C (±0.9 °F ± 0.003 · (T – 32) °F)

Zero point stability

DN Zero point stability

[mm] [in] [kg/h] [lb/min]

8 ³⁄₈ 0.20 0.007

15 ½ 0.65 0.024

25 1 1.80 0.066

40 1½ 4.50 0.165

50 2 7.0 0.257

Flow values
Flow values as turndown parameter depending on nominal diameter.

SI units

DN 1:1 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100 1:500

[mm] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h] [kg/h]

8 2 000 200 100 40 20 4

15 6 500 650 325 130 65 13

25 18 000 1 800 900 360 180 36

40 45 000 4 500 2 250 900 450 90

50 70 000 7 000 3 500 1 400 700 140

214 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

US units

DN 1:1 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100 1:500

[inch] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min] [lb/min]

³⁄₈ 73.50 7.350 3.675 1.470 0.735 0.147

½ 238.9 23.89 11.95 4.778 2.389 0.478

1 661.5 66.15 33.08 13.23 6.615 1.323

1½ 1 654 165.4 82.70 33.08 16.54 3.308

2 2 573 257.3 128.7 51.46 25.73 5.146

Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.

Current output

Accuracy ±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading

Accuracy Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)

Repeatability o.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm3 = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature

Base repeatability
Design fundamentals →  217

Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)

±0.05 % o.r.

Density (liquids)
±0.00025 g/cm3

Temperature
±0.25 °C ± 0.0025 · T °C (±0.45 °F ± 0.0015 · (T–32) °F)

Response time The response time depends on the configuration (damping).

Influence of ambient Current output

temperature
Temperature coefficient Max. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output

Temperature coefficient No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Endress+Hauser 215
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Influence of medium Mass flow and volume flow

temperature o.f.s. = of full scale value
When there is a difference between the temperature for zero point adjustment and the
process temperature, the additional measured error of the sensor is typically ±0.0002 %
o.f.s./°C (±0.0001 % o. f.s./°F).
The effect is reduced if zero point adjustment is performed at process temperature.

Density
When there is a difference between the density calibration temperature and the process
temperature, the typical measured error of the sensor is
±0.0001 g/cm3 /°C (±0.00005 g/cm3 /°F). Field density calibration is possible.
Wide-range density specification (special density calibration)
If the process temperature is outside the valid range (→  214) the measured error is
±0.0001 g/cm3 /°C (±0.00005 g/cm3 /°F)

3
[kg/m ]
14
12
10 1
8
6
2
4
2
0
-50 [°C]
0 50 100 150
[°F]
-80 -40 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320
A0016611

1 Field density calibration, for example at +20 °C (+68 °F)

2 Special density calibration

Temperature
±0.005 · T °C (± 0.005 · (T – 32) °F)

Influence of medium The table below shows the effect on accuracy of mass flow due to a difference between
pressure calibration pressure and process pressure.
o.r. = of reading
It is possible to compensate for the effect by:
• Reading in the current pressure measured value via the current input.
• Specifying a fixed value for the pressure in the device parameters.
Operating Instructions .

DN [% o.r./bar] [% o.r./psi]

[mm] [in]

8 ³⁄₈ –0.002 –0.0001

15 ½ –0.006 –0.0004

25 1 –0.005 –0.0003

216 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

DN [% o.r./bar] [% o.r./psi]

[mm] [in]

40 1½ –0.007 –0.0005

50 2 –0.006 –0.0004

Design fundamentals o.r. = of reading, o.f.s. = of full scale value

BaseAccu = base accuracy in % o.r., BaseRepeat = base repeatability in % o.r.
MeasValue = measured value; ZeroPoint = zero point stability

Calculation of the maximum measured error as a function of the flow rate

Flow rate Maximum measured error in % o.r.

ZeroPoint
³ BaseAccu ⋅ 100 ± BaseAccu
A0021339
A0021332

ZeroPoint ZeroPoint
< BaseAccu ⋅ 100 MeasValue ⋅ 100
±
A0021333 A0021334

Calculation of the maximum repeatability as a function of the flow rate

Flow rate Maximum repeatability in % o.r.

½ ⋅ ZeroPoint
³ BaseRepeat ⋅ 100
A0021340
A0021335

½ ⋅ ZeroPoint ZeroPoint
< BaseRepeat ⋅ 100 ± ½ ⋅ MeasValue ⋅ 100
A0021336 A0021337

Example for maximum measured error

E [%]
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Q [%]
A0030317

E Maximum measured error in % o.r. (example)

Q Flow rate in % of maximum full scale value

16.7 Installation
"Mounting requirements"

16.8 Environment

Ambient temperature →  24
range

Endress+Hauser 217
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature –50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F)

Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (test Z/AD)

Degree of protection Measuring device

• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure
• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure
• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration resistance • Vibration, sinusoidal according to IEC 60068-2-6

– 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
– 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
• Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64
– 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz
– 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz
– Total: 1.54 g rms

Shock resistance Shock, half-sine according to IEC 60068-2-27

6 ms 50 g

Impact resistance Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31

Mechanical load Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)

compatibility (EMC)
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9 Process

Medium temperature range –50 to +150 °C (–58 to +302 °F)

218 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature

Ta

A
B

Tm
A0031121

 30 Exemplary representation, values in the table below.

Ta Ambient temperature
Tm Medium temperature
A Maximum permitted medium temperature Tm at Ta max = 60 °C (140 °F); higher medium temperatures Tm
require a reduced ambient temperature Ta
B Maximum permitted ambient temperature Ta for the maximum specified medium temperature Tm of the
sensor

Values for devices used in the hazardous area:

Separate Ex documentation (XA) for the device →  231.

Not insulated Insulated

A B A B

Ta Tm Ta Tm Ta Tm Ta Tm

60 °C (140 °F) 150 °C (302 °F) – – 60 °C (140 °F) 120 °C (248 °F) 55 °C (131 °F) 150 °C (302 °F)

Density 0 to 5 000 kg/m3 (0 to 312 lb/cf)

Pressure-temperature An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections is

ratings provided in the "Technical Information" document

Secondary containment The sensor housing is filled with dry nitrogen gas and protects the electronics and
mechanics inside.
The following secondary containment pressure ratings/burst pressures are only valid for
standard devices and/or devices equipped with closed purge connections (never opened/as
delivered).
If a device fitted with purge connections (order code for "Sensor option", option CH "Purge
connection") is connected to the purge system, the maximum nominal pressure is
determined by the purge system itself or by the device, depending on which component
has the lower nominal pressure classification.
The secondary containment burst pressure refers to a typical internal pressure achieved
prior to mechanical failure of the secondary containment as determined during type

Endress+Hauser 219
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

testing. The corresponding type test declaration can be ordered with the device (order code
for "Additional approval", option LN "Type test containment").

DN Secondary containment Secondary containment burst pressure

pressure rating
(designed with a safety factor
≥ 4)

[mm] [in] [bar] [psi] [bar] [psi]

8 ³⁄₈ 25 362 190 2 755

15 ½ 25 362 175 2 538

25 1 25 362 165 2 392

40 1½ 25 362 152 2 204

50 2 25 362 103 1 494

If a measuring tube fails (e.g. due to process characteristics like corrosive or abrasive
fluids), the fluid will be contained by the secondary containment.
If the sensor is to be purged with gas (gas detection), it should be equipped with purge
connections.
Do not open the purge connections unless the containment can be filled immediately
with a dry, inert gas. Use only low pressure to purge. Maximum pressure:
5 bar (72.5 psi).
For information on the dimensions: see the "Mechanical construction" section of the
"Technical Information" document

Flow limit Select the nominal diameter by optimizing between the required flow range and
permissible pressure loss.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section →  206
• The minimum recommended full scale value is approx. 1/20 of the maximum full scale
value
• In most applications, 20 to 50 % of the maximum full scale value can be considered ideal
• A low full scale value must be selected for abrasive media (such as liquids with entrained
solids): flow velocity < 1 m/s (< 3 ft/s).
To calculate the flow limit, use the Applicator sizing tool →  203

Pressure loss To calculate the pressure loss, use the Applicator sizing tool →  203

System pressure →  24

16.10 Mechanical construction

Design, dimensions For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

Weight All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with EN/DIN
PN 40 flanges. Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing",
option A "Aluminum, coated".

220 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Different values due to different transmitter versions:

• Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
• Transmitter version for hygienic area
(Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"): +0.2 kg (+0.44 lbs)

Weight in SI units

DN Weight [kg]
[mm]

8 13

15 15

25 20

40 38

50 61

Weight in US units

DN Weight [lbs]
[in]

3/8 29

½ 33

1 44

1½ 84

2 134

Materials Transmitter housing

Order code for "Housing":
• Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

Window material
Order code for "Housing":
• Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": polycarbonate
For order code for "Approval", option BS, CZ, GS, MS and NS: glass

Seals
Order code for "Housing":
Option B "Stainless, hygienic": EPDM

Cable entries/cable glands

Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"

The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.

Cable entry/cable gland Material

Cable gland M20 × 1.5 Plastic/nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" Nickel-plated brass

Endress+Hauser 221
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Cable entry/cable gland Material

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"

Device plug connectors Plug M12 × 1

• Socket: Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
• Contact housing: Polyamide
• Contacts: Gold-plated brass

Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"

The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.

Cable entry/cable gland Material

Cable gland M20 × 1.5 Plastic

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"

Device plug connectors Plug M12 × 1

• Socket: Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
• Contact housing: Polyamide
• Contacts: Gold-plated brass

Sensor housing
• Acid and alkali-resistant outer surface
• Stainless steel 1.4301 (304)

Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L)

Process connections
• Flanges according to EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) / according to ASME B16.5 / according to
JIS B2220:
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
• All other process connections:
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L)
List of all available process connections →  223

Seals
Welded process connections without internal seals

Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

External WLAN antenna

• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Plug: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

222 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Process connections • Fixed flange connections:

– EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) flange
– EN 1092-1 (DIN 2512N) flange
– ASME B16.5 flange
– JIS B2220 flange
– DIN 11864-2 Form A flange, DIN 11866 series A, flange with notch
• Clamp connections
– Tri-Clamp (OD tubes), DIN 11866 series C
– DIN 11864-3 Form A clamp, DIN 11866 series A, with notch
– DIN 32676 clamp, DIN 11866 series A
– ISO 2852 clamp, ISO 2037
• Thread:
– DIN 11851 thread, DIN 11866 series A
– SMS 1145 thread
– ISO 2853 thread, ISO 2037
– DIN 11864-1 Form A thread, DIN 11866 series A
For information on the different materials used in the process connections →  222

Surface roughness All data relate to parts in contact with fluid. The following surface roughness quality can
be ordered.
Ramax = 0.8 µm (32 µin)

16.11 Operability

Languages Can be operated in the following languages:

• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation Via display module

Two display modules are available:
• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control"
• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  70

A0026785

 31 Operation with touch control

Endress+Hauser 223
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Display elements
• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display
• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors
• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individually
configured
• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.

Operating elements
• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,
, 
• Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area

Via remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  202.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for the
following housing version: order code for "Housing": option A "Aluminum, coated"
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A0026786

 32 Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements

The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module .

Material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choice
of transmitter housing material.

Transmitter housing Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing" Material Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated" AlSi10Mg, coated AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".

224 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Connecting cable

Dimensions
Information on the dimensions:
"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.

Remote operation →  68

Service interface →  69

Supported operating tools Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units and
via a variety of interfaces.

Supported operating Operating unit Interface Additional information

tools

Web browser Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service Special Documentation for

with Web browser interface device →  232
• WLAN interface
• Ethernet-based
fieldbus (EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET)

DeviceCare SFE100 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  203

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol

FieldCare SFE500 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  203

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:
• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com
• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com
• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →
Downloads

Web server
Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status
of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.

Endress+Hauser 225
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and the
measuring device:
– Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)
– Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)
– Export event list (.csv file)
– Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)
– Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)
– Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance
– Download driver for system integration
– Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  230)
Webserver special documentation →  232

HistoROM The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
data management comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.

Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Device memory T-DAT S-DAT

Available data • Event logbook such as diagnostic events • Measured value logging ("Extended • Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
for example HistoROM" order option) • Serial number
• Parameter data record backup • Current parameter data record (used • Calibration data
• Device firmware package by firmware at run time) • Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
• Driver for system integration for exporting • Maximum indicators (min/max fixed I/O or multi I/O)
via Web server, e.g.: values)
EDS for EtherNet/IP • Totalizer values

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in the Attachable to the user interface board in In the sensor plug in the transmitter
connection compartment the connection compartment neck part

Data backup
Automatic
• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules
• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing the
previous device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors
• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data are
transferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is ready
for operation again immediately without any errors
• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.

226 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Manual
Additional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:
• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup
• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup

Data transfer
Manual
• Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of the
specific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate the
configuration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)
• Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.:
EDS for EtherNet/IP

Event list
Automatic
• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures
• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server

Data logging
Manual
If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:
• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels
• User configurable recording interval
• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels
• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals

CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the applicable
EU Directives. These are listed in the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along
with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

C-Tick symbol The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions are
provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to this
document on the nameplate.

Endress+Hauser 227
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Sanitary compatibility • 3-A approval

Only devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LP "3A" have
3-A approval.
• EHEDG-tested
Only devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LT "EHEDG" have been
tested and meet the requirements of the EHEDG.
To meet the requirements for EHEDG certification, the device must be used with process
connections in accordance with the EHEDG position paper entitled "Easy Cleanable Pipe
Couplings and Process Connections" (www.ehedg.org).
• FDA
• Food Contact Materials Regulation (EC) 1935/2004

Pharmaceutical • FDA
compatibility • USP Class VI
• TSE/BSE certificate of suitability

EtherNet/IP certification The measuring device is certified and registered by the ODVA (Open Device Vendor
Association). The measuring system meets all the requirements of the following
specifications:
• Certified in accordance with the ODVA Conformance Test
• EtherNet/IP Performance Test
• EtherNet/IP PlugFest compliance
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability)

Pressure Equipment • With the identification PED/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate,
Directive Endress+Hauser confirms conformity with the "Essential Safety Requirements" specified
in Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EC.
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according to
good engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Art. 4, Par. 3 of the Pressure
Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. The range of application is indicated in tables 6 to 9
in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EC.

Radio approval The measuring device has radio approval.

For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation
→  232

Additional certification CRN approval

Some device versions have CRN approval. A CRN-approved process connection with a CSA
approval must be ordered for a CRN-approved device.

Tests and certificates

• Pressure test, internal procedure, inspection certificate
• EN10204-3.1 Material certificate, wetted parts and secondary containment
• PMI test (XRF), internal procedure, wetted parts, test report
• EN10204-2.1 confirmation of compliance with the order and EN10204-2.2 test report

228 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

Other standards and • EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
• IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Fc: vibrate (sinusoidal).
• IEC/EN 60068-2-31
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Ec: shocks due to rough handling,
primarily for devices.
• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory
use - general requirements
• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment
• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments with
microprocessors
• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters
with analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics
• NAMUR NE 80
The application of the pressure equipment directive to process control devices
• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices
• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices
• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications
• NAMUR NE 132
Coriolis mass meter
• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages

Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of the
device. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently from
Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your
local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:
www.endress.com.
Detailed information on the application packages:
Special Documentation for the device →  231

Endress+Hauser 229
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics functions Package Description

Extended HistoROM Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the
measured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):
• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

Heartbeat Technology Package Description

Heartbeat Verification Heartbeat Verification

+Monitoring Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within the
framework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to
an external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:
• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on the
measuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.

Concentration Package Description

Concentration Calculation and outputting of fluid concentrations

measurement and special Many applications use density as a key measured value for monitoring quality or
density controlling processes. The device measures the density of the fluid as standard and
makes this value available to the control system.
The "Special Density" application package offers high-precision density
measurement over a wide density and temperature range particularly for
applications subject to varying process conditions.
The observed density is converted to the concentration of a substance of a binary
mixture using the "Concentration Measurement" application package:
• Choice of predefined fluids (e.g. various sugar solutions, acids, alkalis, salts,
ethanol etc.)
• Common or user-defined units (°Brix, °Plato, % mass, % volume, mol/l etc.) for
standard applications.
• Concentration calculation from user-defined tables.

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  202

230 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Technical data

16.15 Supplementary documentation

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• The W@M Device Viewer : Enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate
or scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

Standard documentation Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor

Measuring device Documentation code

Proline Promass S KA01287D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter

Measuring device Documentation code

Proline 300 KA01339D

Technical Information

Measuring device Documentation code

Promass S 300 TI01278D

Description of device parameters

Measuring device Documentation code

Promass 300 GP01114D

Device-dependent Safety instructions

additional documentation Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de XA01405D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01439D

cCSAus XP XA01373D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de XA01372D

cCSAus Ex nA XA01507D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de XA01468D

INMETRO Ex ec XA01470D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de XA01469D

NEPSI Ex nA XA01471D

Endress+Hauser 231
Technical data Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Remote display and operating module DKX001

Contents Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01498D

cCSAus IS XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA XA01503D

Special documentation

Contents Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive SD01614D

Remote display and operating module DKX001 SD01763D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module SD01793D

Web server SD01968D

Heartbeat Technology SD01982D

Concentration measurement SD02004

Petroleum SD02096D

Installation Instructions

Contents Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories • Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via
W@M Device Viewer →  200
• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  202

232 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Index

Index
0…9 D
3-A approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154
A Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 218
Access authorization to parameters Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Design fundamentals
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Device documentation
Ambient temperature Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Device name
Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
C Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C-Tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cable entries DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cable entry Diagnostic behavior
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 227 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Diagnostic information
Check Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 177
Checklist DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Cleaning Onsite display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cleaning in place (CIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Sterilization in place (SIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Diagnostics
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 DIP switches
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 see Write protection switch
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connection Display
see Electrical connection see Onsite display
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 224
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Display area
Context menu For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Display values
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Endress+Hauser 233
Index Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 27

Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Food Contact Materials Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
E Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Functions
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 see Parameter
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55
EHDEG-certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 G
Electrical connection Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 H
Operating tools Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Via Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Help text
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 I
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Endress+Hauser services Influence
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Environment Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Information on the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Inspection
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Error messages Inspection check
see Diagnostic messages Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EtherNet/IP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Installation conditions
EtherNet/IP certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Extended order code Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
F Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 L
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Local display
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 see Operational display
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Firmware
Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 M
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fix assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

234 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Index

Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18 Operating menu

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Measured values Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
see Process variables Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Measuring device Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 P
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Parameter
Measuring range Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Measuring range, recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Parameter settings
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Medium pressure Calculated values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Medium temperature Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Menu Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Menus Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Mounting dimensions Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
see Installation dimensions Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
N Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Nameplate Measured variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Partially filled pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . 129
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) 104,
Navigation view 106, 112
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 161
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
O Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Onsite display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Select medium (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
see Diagnostic message Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
see In alarm condition Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 174 Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Operating keys System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
see Operating elements Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Endress+Hauser 235
Index Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP

Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 160 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Zero point adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Onsite display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Partial filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Process variables Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
R WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Radio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Reading out diagnostic information, EtherNet/IP . . . 178 Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remedial measures Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Status area
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 176
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Replacement Structure
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Submenu
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131
S Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Secondary containment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sensor Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18 Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Settings Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adapting the measuring device to the process Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

236 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promass S 300 EtherNet/IP Index

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 161 Totalizer
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Transmitter
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Troubleshooting
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 TSE/BSE certificate of suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Turning the electronics housing
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 see Turning the transmitter housing
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Zero point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 U
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Use of the measuring device
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Symbols Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 see Designated use
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 User interface
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 V
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200
System design W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 200
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Weight
see Measuring device design SI units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
System file Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 US units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Wizard
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
T Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Partially filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Temperature range Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 104, 106, 112
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 223 Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Select medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tests and certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Write protection
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tool tip Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
see Help text Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Endress+Hauser 237
www.addresses.endress.com